1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \docbook_table_output 0
158 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
159 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
160 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
161 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
162 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
164 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
165 \author 244031559 "Yuriy"
166 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
177 by the \SpecialChar LyX
182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
184 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
185 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
186 Documentation mailing list:
187 \begin_inset CommandInset href
189 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
201 \begin_inset Newline newline
205 \begin_inset Newline newline
209 \change_deleted -131811572 1600339801
211 \change_inserted -131811572 1600339801
215 \begin_inset Note Note
218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
219 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
220 \begin_inset Newline newline
225 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
233 \begin_layout Standard
234 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
235 LatexCommand tableofcontents
242 \begin_layout Chapter
246 \begin_layout Section
247 What is \SpecialChar LyX
251 \begin_layout Standard
253 is a document preparation system.
254 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
255 scripts, publishable books, business
256 letters and proposals,
257 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
261 It is unlike most other
262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
269 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
271 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
284 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
287 pt type, left justified, 5
288 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
297 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
301 \begin_layout Standard
302 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
307 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
311 \begin_layout Standard
316 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
317 's philosophy: most importantly,
318 the format of all of the manuals.
319 If you don't read it, you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
320 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other
321 manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
324 \begin_layout Section
329 \begin_layout Standard
330 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
331 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
333 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
334 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical
338 \begin_layout Standard
339 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
340 This is not a bug or an oversight, it is intentional.
341 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
343 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
344 only a vertical scrollbar.
347 \begin_layout Standard
348 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
349 The first case is large images.
350 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen, left click on
351 the image and use the option
362 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
365 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
368 \begin_layout Standard
369 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
370 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
378 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
385 \begin_layout Section
389 \begin_layout Standard
390 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
392 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
394 Just select the manual you want to read from the
401 \begin_layout Section
402 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
404 \begin_inset CommandInset label
406 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
413 \begin_layout Standard
414 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
415 can be configured via the menu
417 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
421 \begin_inset Index idx
424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
431 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
433 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
434 packages are available.
435 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
437 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
438 was installed on your system,
439 you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
440 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
444 \begin_inset space \space{}
447 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
448 classes, which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
450 To force \SpecialChar LyX
451 to re-inspect your system use
453 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
457 \begin_inset Index idx
460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
461 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
467 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
468 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
471 \begin_layout Section
474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
476 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
483 \begin_layout Standard
484 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
485 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
486 installed but you will not be
488 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
489 or print your documents
493 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
494 Some \SpecialChar LyX
495 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
504 which can produce PDFs and the like.
507 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
509 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
512 every \SpecialChar LyX
513 document can still be output as plain text
514 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
520 \begin_layout Standard
521 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
523 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
527 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
528 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
531 \begin_layout Standard
532 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
533 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
534 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view
537 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
545 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then
546 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
549 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
553 \begin_inset Index idx
556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
557 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
565 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
572 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
576 \begin_layout Chapter
577 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
581 \begin_layout Section
582 Basic File Operations
583 \begin_inset Index idx
586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
595 \begin_layout Standard
600 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word
601 processor as well as some more advanced operations:
604 \begin_layout Itemize
626 \begin_layout Itemize
642 arg "buffer-new-template"
648 \begin_layout Itemize
670 \begin_layout Itemize
678 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
682 \begin_layout Itemize
684 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
696 \begin_layout Itemize
708 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
712 \begin_layout Itemize
714 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
722 \begin_layout Itemize
744 \begin_layout Itemize
756 arg "buffer-write-as"
760 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
764 \begin_layout Itemize
766 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
782 \begin_layout Itemize
796 \begin_layout Itemize
810 \begin_layout Standard
811 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors, with a
812 few minor differences.
815 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
826 command lists the available templates.
827 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
828 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
829 and possibly propose text fragments
831 for the document, features
832 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
835 you would otherwise need to
836 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
838 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
842 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
846 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
854 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
860 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
861 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
865 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
873 \begin_layout Standard
874 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
906 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
907 to open a file or create a new one, that big
908 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
912 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
916 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
927 \begin_layout Standard
949 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
951 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
954 people work on the same document at the same time.
958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
959 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
962 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
967 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
968 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
970 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
972 \begin_inset Flex Emph
975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
977 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
978 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
987 \begin_inset Flex Emph
990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
992 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1000 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1011 \begin_inset space ~
1015 \begin_inset space ~
1020 will reload the document from disk.
1021 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
1022 and want to restore it to the last save
1023 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1030 \begin_inset space ~
1035 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
1036 them as your changes.
1039 \begin_layout Section
1040 Basic Editing Features
1041 \begin_inset Index idx
1044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1051 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1053 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1060 \begin_layout Standard
1061 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
1062 can perform cut and paste operations
1063 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
1064 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1065 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1066 editing features and how to access
1068 We will start with cut and paste.
1071 \begin_layout Standard
1072 As you might expect, the
1076 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands, along with
1077 various other editing features.
1078 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1082 \begin_layout Itemize
1088 \begin_inset Index idx
1091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1120 \begin_layout Itemize
1126 \begin_inset Index idx
1129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1158 \begin_layout Itemize
1164 \begin_inset Index idx
1167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1192 \begin_layout Itemize
1196 \begin_inset space ~
1202 \begin_layout Itemize
1206 \begin_inset space ~
1212 \begin_layout Itemize
1216 \begin_inset space ~
1220 \begin_inset space ~
1226 \begin_inset Index idx
1229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1238 \begin_inset Index idx
1241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1256 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1266 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1272 \begin_layout Standard
1273 The first three are self-explanatory.
1274 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1275 and other programs using
1296 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted)
1297 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1302 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1303 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1304 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values
1305 (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1306 into individual cells.
1310 \begin_inset space ~
1315 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1316 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1320 \begin_layout Standard
1324 \begin_inset space ~
1329 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard
1331 Possible formats include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1333 \begin_inset space ~
1340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1346 , PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1347 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1348 in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1350 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1354 \begin_inset space \space{}
1357 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1358 text which is often meaningless.)
1361 \begin_layout Standard
1365 \begin_inset space ~
1368 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1370 \begin_inset space ~
1374 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1378 \begin_inset space ~
1387 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1388 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection
1389 is inserted as one paragraph.
1390 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1394 \begin_inset space ~
1399 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1400 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table
1406 \begin_inset space ~
1409 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1411 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1415 \begin_inset space ~
1423 \begin_inset space ~
1426 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1429 paste from the primary selection.
1430 This is normally the currently selected text.
1433 \begin_layout Standard
1436 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1438 \begin_inset space ~
1442 \begin_inset space ~
1450 \begin_inset space ~
1454 \begin_inset space ~
1460 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1466 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1469 \begin_inset space ~
1478 \begin_inset space ~
1483 button to skip the curren
1484 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1488 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1495 \begin_inset space ~
1500 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1504 \begin_inset space ~
1509 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1511 If the toggle is set, searching for
1512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1523 will not match the word
1524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1538 Match whole words only
1540 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1541 to only find complete words, e.
1542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1546 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
1550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1575 also offers an advanced
1578 \begin_inset space ~
1582 \begin_inset space ~
1587 feature that is described in section
1588 \begin_inset space ~
1592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1594 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1601 \begin_layout Standard
1602 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1603 \begin_inset space \space{}
1607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1615 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1617 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1622 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1629 \begin_layout Standard
1633 arg "inset-select-all"
1636 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1637 When the cursor is inside an inset
1640 arg "inset-select-all"
1643 selects the content of the inset.
1647 arg "inset-select-all"
1650 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and
1651 then to the whole document.
1655 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1658 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1662 \begin_layout Section
1664 \begin_inset Index idx
1667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1674 \begin_inset Index idx
1677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1686 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1693 \begin_layout Standard
1694 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1696 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1699 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1702 or the toolbar button
1709 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1711 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1714 or the toolbar button
1721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1728 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1729 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1732 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1735 \begin_layout Standard
1737 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338243
1738 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last
1740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1747 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1748 This is a consequence of the 100
1749 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1752 step undo limit mentioned above.
1755 \begin_layout Standard
1764 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1766 However they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by
1770 \begin_layout Section
1772 \begin_inset Index idx
1775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1784 \begin_layout Standard
1785 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1788 \begin_layout Enumerate
1793 \begin_layout Itemize
1798 once anywhere in the edit window.
1799 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1803 \begin_layout Enumerate
1808 \begin_layout Itemize
1815 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1818 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1821 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1822 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1824 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
1825 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected
1831 \begin_layout Itemize
1832 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1835 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1842 \begin_layout Enumerate
1843 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1847 \begin_layout Standard
1848 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1849 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1853 \begin_layout Section
1855 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1857 name "sec:Navigating"
1862 \begin_inset Index idx
1865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1874 \begin_layout Standard
1876 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1879 \begin_layout Itemize
1884 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1885 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1888 \begin_layout Itemize
1889 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1891 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1893 \begin_inset space ~
1898 or by the toolbar button
1901 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1907 \begin_layout Itemize
1908 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1910 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1913 and use the same menu to return to them.
1914 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1917 \begin_layout Standard
1921 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1926 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1927 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1929 \begin_inset space ~
1934 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1935 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1936 to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your
1937 last editing position.
1940 \begin_layout Standard
1945 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1949 \begin_layout Subsection
1951 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1953 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1958 \begin_inset Index idx
1961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1962 Navigating ! Outline
1968 \begin_inset Index idx
1971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1980 \begin_layout Standard
1981 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between
1982 several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists
1983 of tables and figures, footnotes, labels and cross-references (see section
1984 \begin_inset space ~
1988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1990 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1994 ), notes, or citations (see section
1995 \begin_inset space ~
1999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2001 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2006 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
2010 \begin_layout Standard
2011 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context
2012 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2013 For example with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
2014 dialog and to modify the citation.
2017 \begin_layout Standard
2022 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2023 For example, if you are displaying the list of
2025 Labels and References
2027 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
2029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2036 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2039 \begin_layout Standard
2040 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further
2041 control the display.
2046 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2047 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2052 option keeps it in the current view state.
2053 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2054 \begin_inset space ~
2057 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2058 \begin_inset space ~
2061 3, the subsections of sections
2062 \begin_inset space ~
2065 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2070 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2071 \begin_inset space ~
2075 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2085 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2088 \begin_layout Standard
2095 button refreshes the TOC (
2096 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2098 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2102 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2104 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2108 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2112 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2116 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2120 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2122 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2126 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2128 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2132 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2134 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2138 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2142 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2144 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2148 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2152 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2156 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2160 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2164 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2168 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2172 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2176 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2178 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2182 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
2196 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2197 For example, you can move section
2198 \begin_inset space ~
2202 \begin_inset space ~
2205 2.4 or after section
2206 \begin_inset space ~
2211 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2224 (or the corresponding key bindings
2232 ) you can change the level of sections.
2233 You can make section
2234 \begin_inset space ~
2238 \begin_inset space ~
2242 \begin_inset space ~
2248 \begin_layout Standard
2249 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2250 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2253 \begin_layout Subsection
2254 Horizontal Scrolling
2255 \begin_inset Index idx
2258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2259 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2267 \begin_layout Standard
2269 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats
2271 \begin_inset space ~
2274 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2275 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document
2276 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2280 \begin_layout Standard
2281 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2285 \begin_layout Itemize
2287 is used on a small tablet computer
2290 \begin_layout Itemize
2291 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2303 \begin_inset space ~
2316 \begin_layout Itemize
2317 Math constructs with long command names
2320 \begin_layout Standard
2321 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2322 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2324 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2325 window so that table
2326 \begin_inset space ~
2330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2332 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2337 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the
2339 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2340 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2343 \begin_layout Standard
2344 \begin_inset Float table
2351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2352 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2355 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2357 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2361 Horizontal scrolling test.
2369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2371 \begin_inset Tabular
2372 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2373 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2374 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2375 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2376 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2418 \begin_layout Section
2419 Input/Word Completion
2420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2422 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2427 \begin_inset Index idx
2430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2437 \begin_inset Index idx
2440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2471 \begin_layout Standard
2473 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2475 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2476 is used to propose completions.
2479 \begin_layout Standard
2480 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2483 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2488 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2495 \begin_inset space ~
2499 \begin_inset space ~
2504 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2508 \begin_inset space ~
2513 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2514 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2518 \begin_inset space ~
2524 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2525 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2526 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2527 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2530 \begin_layout Standard
2532 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2533 completions available.
2538 key to accept a proposed completion.
2539 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2540 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
2541 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
2544 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2551 \begin_layout Standard
2552 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2553 ing options for text.
2555 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2557 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2559 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2562 he special math option
2566 enables characters to be composed.
2568 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
2570 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
2574 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
2577 you want to insert the character
2578 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2582 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
2585 input the characters
2586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2598 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
2600 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
2604 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
2606 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
2611 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
2613 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
2616 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the
2619 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
2621 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
2624 supported character combinations can be found in the file
2629 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
2631 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
2635 's installation folder.
2637 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2638 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2645 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2650 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2651 In the example above,
2656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2688 \begin_layout Section
2690 \begin_inset Index idx
2693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2700 \begin_inset Index idx
2703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2732 \begin_inset Index idx
2735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2766 \begin_layout Standard
2767 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2781 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2784 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2788 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2789 \begin_inset space ~
2793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2795 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2802 \begin_layout Standard
2806 \begin_inset space ~
2814 \begin_inset space ~
2835 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2839 \begin_layout Labeling
2840 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2844 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2845 LatexCommand nomenclature
2847 description "Tabulator key"
2854 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2856 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2857 \begin_inset space ~
2861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2863 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2870 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2874 , especially section
2875 \begin_inset space ~
2879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2881 reference "subsec:Lists"
2887 If you are still confused, look in the
2892 \begin_inset Newline newline
2900 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2901 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2905 \begin_layout Labeling
2906 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2910 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2911 LatexCommand nomenclature
2913 description "Escape key"
2921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2928 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2929 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2932 \begin_layout Labeling
2933 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2938 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2939 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2943 \begin_layout Standard
2944 There are three modifier keys:
2947 \begin_layout Labeling
2948 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2966 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2967 LatexCommand nomenclature
2969 description "Control key"
2974 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending
2975 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2979 \begin_layout Itemize
2988 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2991 \begin_layout Itemize
3000 , it moves by words instead of characters.
3003 \begin_layout Itemize
3012 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
3016 \begin_layout Labeling
3017 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3035 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3036 LatexCommand nomenclature
3038 description "Shift key"
3043 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
3044 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3047 \begin_layout Labeling
3048 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3066 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3067 LatexCommand nomenclature
3069 description "Alt or Meta key"
3074 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
3075 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3076 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
3082 \begin_inset Newline newline
3085 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
3087 menu accelerator keys
3090 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
3091 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
3095 \begin_layout Standard
3096 For example, the sequence
3097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3103 \begin_inset space ~
3107 \begin_inset space ~
3113 \begin_inset space ~
3121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3140 \begin_inset space ~
3146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3156 \begin_layout Standard
3161 manual lists all other things bound to the
3169 \begin_layout Standard
3170 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3172 most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom
3174 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered
3175 and any existing key bindings for that action.
3177 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3178 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
3179 in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding
3181 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
3182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3197 followed by a capital
3204 \begin_layout Chapter
3207 \begin_inset Index idx
3210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3220 \begin_layout Section
3222 \begin_inset Index idx
3225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3234 \begin_layout Subsection
3238 \begin_layout Standard
3239 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3240 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3241 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3242 numbering schemes, and so on.
3243 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3244 and format the title of your document differently.
3247 \begin_layout Standard
3252 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3253 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3254 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3255 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3256 picks one for you by default.
3257 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3260 \begin_layout Subsection
3262 \begin_inset Index idx
3265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3272 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3274 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3281 \begin_layout Standard
3282 You can select a class using the
3284 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3285 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3289 \begin_inset Index idx
3292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3299 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3303 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3307 \begin_layout Standard
3308 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3313 \begin_layout Description
3314 Article for basic articles
3317 \begin_layout Description
3318 Report for basic reports
3321 \begin_layout Description
3322 Book for writing a book
3325 \begin_layout Description
3326 Letter for US-style letters
3329 \begin_layout Standard
3330 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3331 only uses if you have installed
3332 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3333 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3334 distributions will include
3336 Here are some of the classes.
3337 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3339 Special Document Classes
3348 \begin_layout Description
3349 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3352 \begin_layout Description
3353 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3357 \begin_layout Description
3358 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3362 \begin_layout Description
3363 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3364 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3365 There are three article layouts available.
3366 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3367 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3368 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3369 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3374 sequential numbering
3375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3378 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3379 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3380 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3381 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3384 \begin_layout Description
3385 Beamer Layout for presentations
3388 \begin_layout Description
3389 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3390 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3391 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3392 with \SpecialChar LyX
3396 \begin_layout Description
3397 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3400 \begin_layout Description
3402 \begin_inset space ~
3405 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3408 \begin_layout Description
3409 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3412 \begin_layout Description
3413 Foils Used to make transparencies
3416 \begin_layout Description
3417 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3418 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3419 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3420 with \SpecialChar LyX
3424 \begin_layout Description
3425 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3426 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3429 \begin_layout Description
3430 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3433 \begin_layout Description
3434 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3437 \begin_layout Description
3438 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3439 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3440 (Is used by this document.)
3443 \begin_layout Description
3444 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3447 \begin_layout Description
3448 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3451 \begin_layout Description
3456 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3457 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3459 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3463 \begin_layout Description
3464 Slides Used to make transparencies
3467 \begin_layout Description
3469 \begin_inset space ~
3472 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3473 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3476 \begin_layout Description
3477 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3480 \begin_layout Standard
3481 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3483 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3485 Special Document Classes
3492 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3493 of the document classes.
3496 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3500 \begin_layout Standard
3501 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3503 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3504 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3506 \begin_inset Index idx
3509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3526 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3527 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3529 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3532 \begin_layout Standard
3535 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3540 , are highly specialized.
3542 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3543 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3544 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3545 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3546 by some document class.
3547 There are just too many of them.
3548 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3551 \begin_layout Standard
3552 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3560 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3561 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3562 document class for a new file.
3564 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3567 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3574 manual for information on how to install them.
3575 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3581 \begin_layout Standard
3582 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3583 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3584 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3585 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3586 class files to be used for dissertation
3587 s submitted to those universities.
3588 The \SpecialChar LyX
3589 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3591 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3595 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3601 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3608 name "subsec:Modules"
3613 \begin_inset Index idx
3616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3625 \begin_layout Standard
3626 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3627 chosen document class.
3628 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3629 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3636 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3640 \begin_inset Index idx
3643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3650 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3654 \begin_layout Standard
3655 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3656 packages or file format converters that are not always
3657 installed by default.
3659 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3660 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3661 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3662 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3664 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3665 file without the missing prerequisites.
3666 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3667 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3670 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3674 \begin_inset Index idx
3677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3678 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3685 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
3689 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3693 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3702 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3704 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3715 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3718 \begin_layout Standard
3719 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3727 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3729 will advise you about these things.
3737 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3739 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3741 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3746 \begin_inset Index idx
3749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3750 Document ! Local Layout
3758 \begin_layout Standard
3759 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3760 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3761 : They are intended to be used in
3762 a variety of different documents.
3763 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3764 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3765 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3766 need a specific inset or
3767 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3769 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
3772 style only that one time.
3773 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3775 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3793 manual for information on how to use it.
3796 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3800 \begin_layout Standard
3801 Each class has a default set of options.
3802 Here's a quick table describing them:
3805 \begin_layout Standard
3806 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3812 \begin_layout Standard
3814 \begin_inset Tabular
3815 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3816 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3817 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3818 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3819 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3820 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3821 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4275 \begin_layout Standard
4276 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4282 \begin_layout Standard
4283 You're probably also wondering what
4284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4288 \begin_inset space ~
4292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4296 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4297 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4302 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4307 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4317 headings, there are also
4325 headings, and so on.
4326 We will describe these headings fully in section
4327 \begin_inset space ~
4331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4333 reference "subsec:Headings"
4340 \begin_layout Subsection
4342 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4344 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4349 \begin_inset Index idx
4352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4359 \begin_inset Index idx
4362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4371 \begin_layout Standard
4372 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4374 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4381 \begin_inset space ~
4389 \begin_inset space ~
4394 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4396 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4397 doesn't support special options you want to
4398 use for your document.
4399 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4400 -class and its options, you have to read
4404 \begin_layout Standard
4406 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
4410 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
4414 \begin_inset space ~
4421 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4427 \begin_inset space ~
4432 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4433 You can choose between the following five options:
4436 \begin_layout Labeling
4437 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4442 Use default page style of current class.
4445 \begin_layout Labeling
4446 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4451 No page numbers or headings.
4454 \begin_layout Labeling
4455 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4463 \begin_layout Labeling
4464 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4469 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4470 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4471 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4472 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4475 \begin_layout Labeling
4476 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4481 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4482 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4488 \begin_inset Index idx
4491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4499 How they are defined is explained in section
4500 \begin_inset space ~
4504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4506 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4513 \begin_layout Standard
4514 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4515 \begin_inset space ~
4519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4521 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4528 \begin_layout Subsection
4529 Paper Size and Orientation
4530 \begin_inset Index idx
4533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4534 Document ! Paper size
4540 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4542 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4549 \begin_layout Standard
4550 You can find the following options in the menu
4553 \begin_inset space ~
4560 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4564 \begin_inset Index idx
4567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4576 \begin_layout Labeling
4577 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4581 \begin_inset space ~
4586 What size paper to print on.
4591 \begin_layout Itemize
4597 \begin_layout Itemize
4603 \begin_layout Itemize
4609 \begin_layout Itemize
4615 \begin_layout Itemize
4618 US letter, US legal, US executive
4621 \begin_layout Itemize
4627 \begin_layout Itemize
4634 \begin_layout Labeling
4635 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4640 To choose whether to output as
4651 \begin_layout Labeling
4652 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4656 \begin_inset space ~
4661 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4662 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4665 \begin_layout Subsection
4667 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4669 name "subsec:Margins"
4674 \begin_inset Index idx
4677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4684 \begin_inset Index idx
4687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4696 \begin_layout Standard
4697 Paper margins are set in the menu
4699 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4703 \begin_inset Index idx
4706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4715 \begin_layout Standard
4716 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4717 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4718 the paper format and the font size into account.
4721 \begin_layout Subsection
4725 \begin_layout Standard
4726 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4727 has to convert everything into the new
4729 That includes the paragraph environments.
4730 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4731 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4732 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4734 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4743 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4745 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4746 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4747 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4750 \begin_layout Section
4751 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4752 \begin_inset Index idx
4755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4756 Paragraph ! Indentation
4764 \begin_layout Subsection
4766 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4768 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4775 \begin_layout Standard
4776 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4777 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4780 \begin_layout Standard
4781 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4782 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4783 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4784 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4788 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4794 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4795 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4796 language than English.
4798 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4801 \begin_layout Standard
4802 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4803 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4804 into \SpecialChar LyX
4806 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4809 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4811 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4812 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4813 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4820 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4821 goes to produce a printable file.
4826 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4828 gives you the ability globally to change
4832 these pre-coded spacings.
4833 We will explain more later.
4836 \begin_layout Subsection
4837 Paragraph Separation
4838 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4840 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4845 \begin_inset Index idx
4848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4849 Paragraph ! Separation
4857 \begin_layout Standard
4865 \begin_inset space ~
4873 \begin_inset space ~
4880 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4884 \begin_inset Index idx
4887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4893 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4896 \begin_layout Subsection
4900 \begin_layout Standard
4901 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4904 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4906 \begin_inset space ~
4911 dialog and toggle the
4914 \begin_inset space ~
4919 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4922 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4926 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4927 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4931 \begin_layout Standard
4932 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4933 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4936 \begin_layout Subsection
4938 \begin_inset Index idx
4941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4942 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4950 \begin_layout Standard
4953 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4957 \begin_inset Index idx
4960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4969 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4973 \begin_inset space ~
4982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4983 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4989 \begin_inset Index idx
4992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4999 installed to use this feature.
5004 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5006 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5008 \begin_inset space ~
5013 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
5014 is normally defined in the environment's style.
5017 \begin_layout Section
5018 Paragraph Environments
5019 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5021 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
5026 \begin_inset Index idx
5029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5030 Paragraph ! Environments
5036 \begin_inset Index idx
5039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5040 Paragraph environments|(
5048 \begin_layout Subsection
5052 \begin_layout Standard
5053 Paragraph environments correspond to the
5056 \begin_layout Standard
5065 } \SpecialChar ldots
5075 \begin_inset Newline newline
5078 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
5080 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
5081 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
5082 alien to you, we urge you to read the
5091 also contains many more examples than this section does.
5094 \begin_layout Standard
5095 A paragraph environment is simply a
5096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5103 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
5104 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
5105 scheme, labels, and so on.
5106 Additionally, you can
5107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5114 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
5115 to inherit some of the properties of another.
5116 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
5117 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
5119 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
5121 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
5124 \begin_layout Standard
5125 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
5126 \begin_inset Graphics
5127 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
5133 at the left end of the toolbar.
5135 will change the environment of the
5139 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
5140 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
5141 you select them before choosing the new environment.
5144 \begin_layout Standard
5153 create a new paragraph using the
5157 paragraph environment.
5159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5166 because if you are in one of these environments:
5169 \begin_layout Itemize
5175 \begin_layout Itemize
5181 \begin_layout Itemize
5187 \begin_layout Itemize
5193 \begin_layout Itemize
5199 \begin_layout Itemize
5205 \begin_layout Itemize
5211 \begin_layout Standard
5213 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
5217 , rather than resetting it to
5222 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
5223 \begin_inset space ~
5227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5229 reference "sec:Nesting"
5236 \begin_layout Subsection
5240 \begin_layout Standard
5241 The default paragraph environment is
5246 It creates a plain paragraph.
5248 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
5249 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
5250 this manual) are in the
5257 \begin_layout Standard
5258 You can nest a paragraph using the
5262 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5270 \begin_layout Subsection
5272 \begin_inset Index idx
5275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5284 \begin_layout Standard
5285 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5286 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5295 for thanks or contact information.
5296 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5297 places all of this on a separate page
5298 along with today's date.
5299 For other types of documents, the title
5300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5307 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5310 \begin_layout Standard
5312 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5326 Here's how you use them:
5329 \begin_layout Itemize
5330 Put the title of your document in the
5337 \begin_layout Itemize
5338 Put the author name in the
5345 \begin_layout Itemize
5346 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5347 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5353 Note that using this environment is optional.
5354 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5355 will automatically insert today's date.
5356 If you don't want a date, use the option
5358 Suppress default date on front page
5362 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5363 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5365 \begin_inset space ~
5373 \begin_layout Standard
5374 You can use footnotes to insert
5375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5382 or contact information.
5385 \begin_layout Subsection
5387 \begin_inset Index idx
5390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5399 name "subsec:Headings"
5406 \begin_layout Standard
5407 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5409 takes care of the numbering for you.
5412 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5414 \begin_inset Index idx
5417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5418 Section headings ! Numbered
5426 \begin_layout Standard
5427 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5431 \begin_layout Enumerate
5437 \begin_layout Enumerate
5443 \begin_layout Enumerate
5449 \begin_layout Enumerate
5455 \begin_layout Enumerate
5461 \begin_layout Enumerate
5467 \begin_layout Enumerate
5473 \begin_layout Standard
5475 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5476 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5477 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with
5478 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
5480 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
5482 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
5488 \begin_layout Standard
5489 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5490 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5491 You group the book into chapters.
5493 does a similar grouping:
5496 \begin_layout Itemize
5501 is divided into either
5512 \begin_layout Itemize
5524 \begin_layout Itemize
5536 \begin_layout Itemize
5548 \begin_layout Itemize
5560 \begin_layout Itemize
5572 \begin_layout Standard
5573 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5581 Not all document types use the
5585 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5590 is the top-level heading.
5598 \begin_layout Standard
5603 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5604 labels it with its number,
5605 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5607 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5619 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5621 \begin_inset Index idx
5624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5625 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5633 \begin_layout Standard
5634 The unnumbered section headings have a
5635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5642 at the end of their name.
5643 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5644 the table of contents, see section
5645 \begin_inset space ~
5649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5658 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5659 Changing the Numbering
5660 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5662 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5669 \begin_layout Standard
5670 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5671 in the Table of Contents.
5672 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5674 Just as certain classes start with
5688 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5698 This is something you can change.
5701 \begin_layout Standard
5704 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5708 \begin_inset Index idx
5711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5720 \begin_inset space ~
5724 \begin_inset space ~
5729 you will see two counters.
5734 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5735 numbers a section heading.
5736 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5740 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5741 Short Titles of Headings
5742 \begin_inset Index idx
5745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5746 Section headings ! Short titles
5752 \begin_inset Argument 1
5755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5762 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5764 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5771 \begin_layout Standard
5772 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5773 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5774 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5775 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5778 \begin_layout Standard
5780 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5781 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5782 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5783 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5786 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5788 \begin_inset space ~
5794 This will insert a box labeled
5795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5799 \begin_inset space ~
5803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5806 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5807 This also works for captions inside floats.
5808 There can only be one short title per title.
5811 \begin_layout Standard
5812 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5815 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5819 \begin_layout Standard
5820 The following information applies to all section headings:
5823 \begin_layout Itemize
5824 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5827 \begin_layout Itemize
5828 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5831 \begin_layout Itemize
5832 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5835 \begin_layout Itemize
5836 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5839 \begin_layout Subsection
5843 \begin_layout Standard
5845 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5859 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5860 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5861 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5862 the text they contain.
5863 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5871 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5874 \begin_layout Standard
5875 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5884 when you start a new paragraph.
5885 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5889 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5890 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5891 have to change back to the
5895 environment yourself.
5898 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5900 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5907 \begin_inset Index idx
5910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5919 \begin_layout Standard
5920 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5921 time for the differences.
5930 are identical except for one difference:
5934 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5943 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5946 \begin_layout Standard
5947 Here's an example of the
5960 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5962 See – no indentation!
5966 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5967 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5968 the other paragraph.
5971 \begin_layout Standard
5972 Here's another example, this time in the
5979 \begin_layout Quotation
5985 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5986 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5987 the first line, then
5991 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5995 you were quoting other text.
5998 \begin_layout Quotation
5999 Here's a new paragraph.
6000 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
6001 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
6004 \begin_layout Standard
6005 As the examples show,
6009 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
6010 They should put quotes in the
6015 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
6019 paragraph environment for quoted text.
6022 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6024 \begin_inset Index idx
6027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6034 \begin_inset Index idx
6037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6053 \begin_layout Standard
6058 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
6064 \begin_inset Newline newline
6067 Which I did not rehearse!
6071 It could be much worse.
6072 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
6074 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
6075 indented a bit more than the first.
6076 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
6082 \begin_inset Newline newline
6085 And make things look fine
6086 \begin_inset Newline newline
6092 arg "newline-insert newline"
6098 \begin_layout Standard
6103 does not indent both margins.
6104 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
6105 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
6108 arg "newline-insert newline"
6114 \begin_layout Subsection
6116 \begin_inset Index idx
6119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6126 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6135 \begin_layout Standard
6137 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
6147 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6148 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
6157 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6158 lets you provide your own label.
6159 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
6160 describing some general features of all four of them.
6163 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6167 \begin_layout Standard
6168 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
6170 First, \SpecialChar LyX
6171 treats each paragraph as a list item.
6180 reset the environment to
6184 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
6185 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
6186 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
6190 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
6194 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
6201 \begin_layout Standard
6202 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
6203 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
6204 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
6206 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
6207 you read all of section
6208 \begin_inset space ~
6212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6214 reference "sec:Nesting"
6221 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6223 \begin_inset Index idx
6226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6233 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6242 \begin_layout Standard
6243 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
6247 paragraph environment.
6248 It has the following properties:
6251 \begin_layout Itemize
6252 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
6256 \begin_layout Itemize
6258 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
6261 \begin_layout Itemize
6262 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
6266 \begin_layout Itemize
6267 The items can have any length.
6269 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6270 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6277 \begin_layout Itemize
6282 environment inside another
6286 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6290 \begin_layout Itemize
6291 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6294 \begin_layout Itemize
6296 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6299 \begin_layout Itemize
6301 \begin_inset space ~
6305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6307 reference "sec:Nesting"
6311 for a full explanation of nesting.
6315 \begin_layout Standard
6316 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6325 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6328 \begin_layout Standard
6329 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6330 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6333 \begin_layout Itemize
6334 The label for the first level
6338 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6342 \begin_layout Itemize
6343 The label for the second level is a dash.
6347 \begin_layout Itemize
6348 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6352 \begin_layout Itemize
6353 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6357 \begin_layout Itemize
6358 Back out to the third level.
6362 \begin_layout Itemize
6363 Back to the second level.
6367 \begin_layout Itemize
6368 Back to the outermost level.
6371 \begin_layout Standard
6372 These are the default labels for an
6377 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6379 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6382 dialog in the submenu
6387 \begin_inset Index idx
6390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6396 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6400 \begin_layout Standard
6401 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6402 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6404 \begin_inset space ~
6408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6410 reference "sec:Nesting"
6417 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6419 \begin_inset Index idx
6422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6429 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6431 name "sec:Enumerate"
6438 \begin_layout Standard
6443 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6444 It has these properties:
6447 \begin_layout Enumerate
6448 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6452 \begin_layout Enumerate
6453 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6457 \begin_layout Enumerate
6459 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6462 \begin_layout Enumerate
6467 environment resets the counter to one.
6470 \begin_layout Enumerate
6483 \begin_layout Enumerate
6484 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6485 Items can have any length.
6488 \begin_layout Enumerate
6489 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6492 \begin_layout Enumerate
6493 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6496 \begin_layout Enumerate
6497 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6501 \begin_layout Standard
6510 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6512 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6513 labels the four different levels in an
6520 \begin_layout Enumerate
6521 The first level of an
6525 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6529 \begin_layout Enumerate
6530 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6534 \begin_layout Enumerate
6535 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6539 \begin_layout Enumerate
6540 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6543 \begin_layout Enumerate
6544 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6549 \begin_layout Enumerate
6550 Back to the third level
6554 \begin_layout Enumerate
6555 Back to the second level.
6559 \begin_layout Enumerate
6560 Back to the outermost level.
6563 \begin_layout Standard
6564 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6568 environment, see section
6569 \begin_inset space ~
6573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6575 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6580 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6584 \begin_layout Standard
6585 There is more to nesting
6589 environments than we've stated here.
6590 You should read section
6591 \begin_inset space ~
6595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6597 reference "sec:Nesting"
6601 to learn more about nesting.
6604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6606 \begin_inset Index idx
6609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6618 \begin_layout Standard
6619 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6623 list has no fixed label.
6624 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6633 of the first line as the label.
6637 \begin_layout Description
6638 Example: This is an example of the
6645 \begin_layout Standard
6647 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6651 \begin_layout Standard
6653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6660 it is meant that the first usage of the
6664 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6666 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6674 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6679 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6680 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6682 \begin_inset space ~
6688 \begin_inset space ~
6692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6694 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6698 for more information.) Here is an example:
6701 \begin_layout Description
6703 \begin_inset space ~
6706 Example: This one shows how to use a
6709 \begin_inset space ~
6721 \begin_layout Description
6722 Usage: You should use the
6726 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6727 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6729 It's not a good idea to use a
6733 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6734 You're better off using
6746 paragraphs into them.
6749 \begin_layout Description
6750 Nesting: You can nest
6754 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6758 \begin_layout Standard
6759 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6760 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6761 them from the first line.
6764 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6766 \begin_inset Index idx
6769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6778 \begin_layout Standard
6783 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6784 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6788 \begin_layout Standard
6797 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6799 Here are its properties:
6802 \begin_layout Labeling
6803 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6805 \begin_inset space ~
6808 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6817 of each line as the item label.
6822 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6823 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6824 space as described above.
6827 \begin_layout Labeling
6828 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6829 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6830 uses different margins for the item label and the
6831 body of the item text.
6832 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6833 label width plus a little extra space.
6836 \begin_layout Labeling
6837 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6839 \begin_inset space ~
6842 width \SpecialChar LyX
6843 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6844 If the label width is larger, the label
6845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6852 into the first line.
6853 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6854 margin of the rest of the item text.
6857 \begin_layout Labeling
6858 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6860 \begin_inset space ~
6863 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6868 environment has the same left margin.
6869 \begin_inset Newline newline
6872 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6875 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6877 \begin_inset space ~
6882 dialog (toolbar button
6885 arg "layout-paragraph"
6892 \begin_inset space ~
6897 determines the default label width.
6898 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6907 multiple times instead.
6908 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6918 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6921 \begin_inset space ~
6926 every time you alter a label in a
6931 \begin_inset Newline newline
6934 The predefined default width is the length of
6935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6943 \begin_inset space ~
6949 \begin_layout Standard
6954 list the same way as the
6958 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6964 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6968 \begin_layout Standard
6973 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6974 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6976 \begin_inset space ~
6980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6982 reference "sec:Nesting"
6986 to learn about nesting.
6989 \begin_layout Standard
6990 There is yet another feature of the
6994 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6995 left-justifies the item labels by
6997 You can use additional
7001 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
7002 justifies the item label.
7007 are documented in section
7008 \begin_inset space ~
7012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7014 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
7019 Here are some examples:
7022 \begin_layout Labeling
7023 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7024 Left The default for
7031 \begin_layout Labeling
7032 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7033 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7040 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
7043 \begin_layout Labeling
7044 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7045 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7049 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7056 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
7059 \begin_layout Subsection
7061 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7063 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7068 \begin_inset Index idx
7071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7080 \begin_layout Standard
7081 The features described in this section require that the module
7083 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
7085 is loaded in the document settings.
7086 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7092 \begin_inset Index idx
7095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7105 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7106 Custom Enumerate Lists
7107 \begin_inset Index idx
7110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7111 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
7119 \begin_layout Standard
7121 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
7124 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7127 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
7128 There you add the command
7131 \begin_layout Standard
7139 \begin_layout Standard
7151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7152 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
7153 Code, look at section
7154 \begin_inset space ~
7158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7160 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
7173 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
7180 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
7181 For capital Roman numerals replace
7193 in the command above.
7194 For Arabic numerals use
7202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7209 items with capital or small Latin letters use
7224 \begin_layout Standard
7226 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7234 You can only number 26
7235 \begin_inset space ~
7238 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
7246 \begin_layout Standard
7247 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
7248 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
7251 \begin_layout Standard
7252 Here is a list with custom numbering:
7255 \begin_layout Enumerate
7256 \begin_inset Argument 1
7259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7285 \begin_layout Enumerate
7286 \begin_inset Argument 1
7289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7312 \begin_layout Enumerate
7317 \begin_layout Enumerate
7318 \begin_inset Argument 1
7321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7345 \begin_layout Enumerate
7346 \begin_inset Argument 1
7349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7375 \begin_layout Standard
7376 For this list these commands were used:
7379 \begin_layout Standard
7390 \begin_inset Newline newline
7398 \begin_inset Newline newline
7406 \begin_inset Newline newline
7416 \begin_layout Standard
7423 makes the label emphasized and
7432 \begin_layout Standard
7433 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7441 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7442 lists until you change the definition.
7450 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7452 \begin_inset Index idx
7455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7456 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7464 \begin_layout Standard
7465 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7468 \begin_layout Enumerate
7469 \begin_inset Argument 1
7472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7491 \begin_inset Note Note
7494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7495 goes back to default numbering
7503 \begin_layout Enumerate
7507 \begin_layout Standard
7511 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7515 \begin_layout Standard
7516 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7521 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7522 to indicate that it is a resumed
7523 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7524 , but in the output.
7527 \begin_layout Standard
7528 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7536 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7545 \begin_layout Standard
7546 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7548 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7549 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7550 of a normal enumeration.
7551 There, insert the command
7554 \begin_layout Standard
7560 \begin_layout Standard
7565 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7569 \begin_layout Enumerate
7573 \begin_layout Enumerate
7577 \begin_layout Standard
7578 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7581 \begin_layout Enumerate
7582 \begin_inset Argument 1
7585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7601 This enumeration starts at 4
7604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7606 \begin_inset Index idx
7609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7618 \begin_layout Standard
7619 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7621 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7624 \begin_layout Itemize
7628 \begin_layout Itemize
7629 with standard spacing
7632 \begin_layout Standard
7633 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7635 Add there the command
7639 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7642 \begin_layout Itemize
7643 \begin_inset Argument 1
7646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7665 \begin_layout Itemize
7669 \begin_layout Itemize
7673 \begin_layout Standard
7674 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7681 \begin_inset Index idx
7684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7692 For more information see its documentation,
7693 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7703 \begin_layout Standard
7704 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7706 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7707 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7708 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7711 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7714 \begin_layout Enumerate
7715 \begin_inset Argument 1
7718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7726 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7739 \begin_layout Enumerate
7740 with negative indentation
7743 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7744 Further Customization
7745 \begin_inset Index idx
7748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7749 Lists ! Customization
7757 \begin_layout Standard
7758 You can also change the style of description lists.
7762 \begin_layout Standard
7768 \begin_layout Standard
7769 changes the description label font, the command
7772 \begin_layout Standard
7778 \begin_layout Standard
7779 sets the list style.
7782 \begin_layout Standard
7783 An example where the command
7786 \begin_layout Standard
7791 itshape, style=nextline
7794 \begin_layout Standard
7798 \begin_layout Description
7800 \begin_inset space ~
7804 \begin_inset Argument 1
7807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7813 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7815 itshape, style=nextline
7825 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7826 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7830 \begin_layout Description
7832 \begin_inset space ~
7835 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7836 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7837 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7840 \begin_layout Standard
7841 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7847 \begin_inset Index idx
7850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7858 For more information see its documentation
7859 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7869 \begin_layout Subsection
7871 \begin_inset Index idx
7874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7883 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7885 \begin_inset space ~
7888 Address: An Overview
7891 \begin_layout Standard
7892 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7893 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7901 \begin_inset space ~
7907 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7908 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7909 gags on the document.
7910 In contrast, you can use the
7917 \begin_inset space ~
7922 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7923 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7927 \begin_layout Standard
7928 Of course, you're not limited to using
7935 \begin_inset space ~
7944 \begin_inset space ~
7949 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7950 some European academic papers.
7953 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7955 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7957 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7964 \begin_layout Standard
7969 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7970 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7974 \begin_inset space ~
7979 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7980 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7981 Here's an example of each:
7984 \begin_layout Right Address
7986 \begin_inset Newline newline
7990 \begin_inset Newline newline
7994 \begin_inset Newline newline
7997 When is it? What is today?
8000 \begin_layout Standard
8004 \begin_inset space ~
8010 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
8012 the largest block of text on a single line.
8013 Here's an example of the
8020 \begin_layout Address
8022 \begin_inset Newline newline
8025 Where do I send this
8026 \begin_inset Newline newline
8029 Your post office and country
8032 \begin_layout Standard
8033 As you can see, both
8040 \begin_inset space ~
8045 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
8050 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
8051 resets the nesting depth and sets the
8057 This makes sense, since
8065 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
8066 Thus, you have to use
8073 arg "newline-insert newline"
8078 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8079 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
8081 \begin_inset space ~
8085 \begin_inset space ~
8090 ) to start a new line in an
8097 \begin_inset space ~
8105 \begin_layout Subsection
8109 \begin_layout Standard
8110 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
8111 or list of references.
8113 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
8116 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8118 \begin_inset Index idx
8121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8130 \begin_layout Standard
8135 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
8136 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8137 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
8138 Also, don't bother trying to nest
8142 in anything else or vice versa.
8148 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
8149 The book document classes ignores the
8153 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
8157 in a letter document class.
8160 \begin_layout Standard
8165 environment does several things for you.
8166 First, it puts the centered label
8167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8175 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
8177 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
8178 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
8179 the subsequent text.
8180 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
8182 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
8186 \begin_layout Standard
8187 Starting a new paragraph by entering
8191 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8192 The new paragraph will still be in the
8197 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
8198 finish entering the abstract of your document.
8201 \begin_layout Standard
8202 \begin_inset Float figure
8209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8211 \begin_inset Graphics
8212 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
8219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8220 \begin_inset Caption Standard
8222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8223 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8225 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8246 \begin_layout Standard
8247 We would love to demonstrate the
8251 environment, but since this document is in the
8252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8259 class, we can't do this.
8260 We inserted it therefore as figure
8261 \begin_inset space ~
8265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8267 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8272 If you have never heard of an
8273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8280 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8283 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8285 \begin_inset Index idx
8288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8295 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8297 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8304 \begin_layout Standard
8309 environment is used to list references.
8310 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8311 only use it at the end of the document.
8323 \begin_layout Standard
8324 When you first open a
8328 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8329 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8345 depending on the document class.
8346 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8347 Each paragraph of the
8351 environment is a bibliography entry.
8356 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8357 Each new paragraph is still in the
8364 \begin_layout Standard
8365 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8366 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8368 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8370 handling, have a look at section
8371 \begin_inset space ~
8375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8377 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8384 \begin_layout Subsection
8385 Special Environments
8388 \begin_layout Standard
8390 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8391 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8394 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8399 \begin_inset Index idx
8402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8410 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8412 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8419 \begin_layout Standard
8425 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8427 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8432 key as a fixed whitespace.
8436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8449 \begin_inset space ~
8454 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8472 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8475 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8478 arg "newline-insert newline"
8495 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8496 So, when you finish using the
8501 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8502 Also, you can nest the
8507 environment inside of others.
8510 \begin_layout Standard
8511 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8514 \begin_layout Itemize
8518 arg "newline-insert newline"
8521 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8526 \begin_inset space \space{}
8536 arg "newline-insert newline"
8542 \begin_layout Itemize
8546 arg "newline-insert newline"
8556 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8562 \begin_layout Itemize
8563 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8564 You must put at least one
8568 in any line you want blank.
8569 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8573 \begin_layout Itemize
8574 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8578 since that will insert
8583 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8586 arg "self-insert \""
8592 \begin_layout Standard
8596 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8600 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8604 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8608 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8612 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8613 printf("Hello World!
8618 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8622 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8626 \begin_layout Standard
8627 This is just the standard
8628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8638 \begin_layout Standard
8644 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8646 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8647 as if you used a typewriter.
8648 \begin_inset Index idx
8651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8652 Paragraph environments|)
8657 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8660 Program Code Listings
8665 \begin_inset space ~
8673 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8677 \begin_inset Index idx
8680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8689 \begin_layout Standard
8694 environment is similar to the
8699 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8700 computer console text.
8705 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8719 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8720 you can have empty lines.
8733 \begin_layout Itemize
8734 have a certain language and a text style
8737 \begin_layout Itemize
8738 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8739 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8740 and \SpecialChar TeX
8744 \begin_layout Standard
8745 Because of these properties
8749 works like a typewriter.
8753 \begin_layout Verbatim
8758 \begin_layout Verbatim
8762 The following 2 lines are empty:
8765 \begin_layout Verbatim
8769 \begin_layout Verbatim
8773 \begin_layout Verbatim
8775 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8780 \begin_layout Standard
8785 environment is identical to
8789 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8790 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8797 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8802 \begin_layout Section
8803 Nesting Environments
8804 \begin_inset Index idx
8807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8808 Nesting ! Environments
8814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8823 \begin_layout Subsection
8827 \begin_layout Standard
8829 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8831 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8833 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8835 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8847 \begin_layout Enumerate
8851 \begin_layout Enumerate
8856 \begin_layout Enumerate
8860 \begin_layout Enumerate
8865 \begin_layout Enumerate
8869 \begin_layout Standard
8870 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8871 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8873 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8875 \begin_inset space ~
8879 \begin_inset space ~
8887 \begin_inset space ~
8891 \begin_inset space ~
8896 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8898 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8901 arg "depth-increment"
8907 arg "depth-decrement"
8921 arg "depth-increment"
8927 arg "depth-decrement"
8931 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8932 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8936 \begin_layout Standard
8937 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8938 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8939 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8940 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8941 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8944 \begin_layout Standard
8945 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8947 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8949 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8952 \begin_layout Subsection
8953 What You Can and Can't Nest
8956 \begin_layout Standard
8957 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8958 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8961 \begin_layout Standard
8962 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8963 than a simple yes or no.
8964 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8967 \begin_layout Itemize
8968 Completely unnestable
8971 \begin_layout Itemize
8972 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8976 \begin_layout Itemize
8977 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8981 \begin_layout Standard
8982 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8983 environments have them:
8986 \begin_layout Description
8987 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8988 Can't nest into them.
8992 \begin_layout Itemize
8998 \begin_layout Itemize
9004 \begin_layout Itemize
9010 \begin_layout Itemize
9016 \begin_layout Itemize
9023 \begin_layout Description
9025 \begin_inset space ~
9028 Nestable You can nest them.
9029 You can nest other things into them.
9033 \begin_layout Itemize
9039 \begin_layout Itemize
9045 \begin_layout Itemize
9051 \begin_layout Itemize
9057 \begin_layout Itemize
9063 \begin_layout Itemize
9069 \begin_layout Itemize
9075 \begin_layout Itemize
9082 \begin_layout Itemize
9088 \begin_layout Itemize
9095 \begin_layout Description
9096 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
9097 You can't nest anything into them.
9101 \begin_layout Itemize
9107 \begin_layout Itemize
9113 \begin_layout Itemize
9119 \begin_layout Itemize
9125 \begin_layout Itemize
9131 \begin_layout Itemize
9137 \begin_layout Itemize
9143 \begin_layout Itemize
9149 \begin_layout Itemize
9155 \begin_layout Itemize
9161 \begin_layout Itemize
9167 \begin_layout Itemize
9173 \begin_layout Itemize
9179 \begin_layout Itemize
9183 \begin_inset space ~
9189 \begin_layout Itemize
9196 \begin_layout Standard
9197 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9205 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
9215 \begin_inset space ~
9218 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
9219 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
9220 nested section headings violate this.
9228 \begin_layout Subsection
9229 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
9230 \begin_inset Index idx
9233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9234 Nesting ! Tables etc.
9242 \begin_layout Standard
9243 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
9244 affected by nesting anyhow.
9248 \begin_layout Itemize
9252 \begin_layout Itemize
9256 \begin_layout Itemize
9260 \begin_layout Standard
9262 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9270 Figures and tables in
9274 are not affected by this.
9279 Have a look at section
9280 \begin_inset space ~
9284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9286 reference "sec:Floats"
9290 for more information about
9297 \begin_layout Standard
9299 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9300 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9304 \begin_layout Standard
9305 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9313 of its own, it behaves just like a
9314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9321 paragraph environment.
9322 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9326 \begin_layout Standard
9327 Here's an example with a table:
9330 \begin_layout Enumerate
9335 \begin_layout Enumerate
9336 This is (a) and it's nested.
9340 \begin_layout Standard
9341 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9347 \begin_layout Standard
9349 \begin_inset Tabular
9350 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9351 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9352 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9353 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9437 \begin_layout Standard
9438 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9445 \begin_layout Enumerate
9447 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9451 \begin_layout Enumerate
9455 \begin_layout Standard
9456 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9459 \begin_layout Enumerate
9464 \begin_layout Enumerate
9465 This is (a) and it's nested.
9469 \begin_layout Standard
9470 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9476 \begin_layout Standard
9478 \begin_inset Tabular
9479 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9480 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9481 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9482 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9566 \begin_layout Standard
9567 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9573 \begin_layout Enumerate
9580 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9583 \begin_layout Enumerate
9587 \begin_layout Standard
9588 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9592 \begin_layout Standard
9593 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9596 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9599 \begin_layout Enumerate
9604 \begin_layout Enumerate
9605 This is (a) and it's nested.
9608 \begin_layout Standard
9609 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9615 \begin_layout Standard
9617 \begin_inset Tabular
9618 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9619 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9620 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9621 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9706 \begin_layout Standard
9707 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9713 \begin_layout Enumerate
9715 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9722 \begin_layout Enumerate
9726 \begin_layout Standard
9727 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9733 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9734 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9738 \begin_layout Subsection
9739 Usage and General Features
9742 \begin_layout Standard
9743 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9744 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9753 is the innermost possible depth.
9754 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9757 \begin_layout Enumerate
9758 level #1 – outermost
9762 \begin_layout Enumerate
9767 \begin_layout Enumerate
9772 \begin_layout Enumerate
9777 \begin_layout Itemize
9782 \begin_layout Itemize
9791 \begin_layout Standard
9792 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9793 both of them in the example.
9794 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9804 For example, if we tried to nest another
9809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9816 , we would get errors.
9819 \begin_layout Subsection
9821 \begin_inset Index idx
9824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9833 \begin_layout Standard
9834 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9835 We have several examples of nested environments.
9836 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9840 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9841 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9844 \begin_layout Labeling
9845 \labelwidthstring MMM
9846 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9855 \begin_layout Labeling
9856 \labelwidthstring MMM
9857 #2-a This is level #2.
9858 We created it by using
9861 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9867 arg "depth-increment"
9874 \begin_layout Labeling
9875 \labelwidthstring MMM
9876 #3-a This is level #3.
9877 This time, we just enter
9884 arg "depth-increment"
9888 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9892 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9898 arg "depth-increment"
9905 \begin_layout Standard
9910 environment, nested inside of
9911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9919 So, it's at level #4.
9920 We did this by entering
9923 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9929 arg "depth-increment"
9932 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9937 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9953 \begin_layout Standard
9958 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9961 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9967 \begin_layout Labeling
9968 \labelwidthstring MMM
9969 #4-a This is level #4.
9973 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9976 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9981 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9985 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9990 keep nesting things inside
9991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10002 \begin_layout Labeling
10003 \labelwidthstring MMM
10004 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
10009 \begin_layout Labeling
10010 \labelwidthstring MMM
10011 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
10012 and this is level #6.
10013 By now, you should know how we made these two.
10017 \begin_layout Labeling
10018 \labelwidthstring MMM
10019 #5-b Back to level #5.
10023 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10029 arg "depth-decrement"
10036 \begin_layout Labeling
10037 \labelwidthstring MMM
10041 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10047 arg "depth-decrement"
10050 , we're back at level #4.
10054 \begin_layout Labeling
10055 \labelwidthstring MMM
10056 #3-b Back to level #3.
10057 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
10061 \begin_layout Labeling
10062 \labelwidthstring MMM
10063 #2-b Back to level #2.
10067 \begin_layout Labeling
10068 \labelwidthstring MMM
10069 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
10070 After this sentence, we will enter
10074 and change the paragraph environment back to
10081 \begin_layout Standard
10082 We could have also used the
10098 environment in place of the
10103 The example would have worked exactly the same.
10106 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10107 Example 2: Inheritance
10110 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10111 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
10114 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10123 arg "depth-increment"
10127 \begin_inset Newline newline
10130 which, we will change to the
10138 \begin_layout Enumerate
10143 environment, at level #2.
10146 \begin_layout Enumerate
10147 Notice how the nested
10151 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
10155 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
10159 \begin_layout Standard
10160 We ended this example by entering
10165 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
10169 and reset the nesting depth by using
10172 arg "depth-decrement"
10178 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10179 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
10188 \begin_inset Argument 1
10191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10192 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
10200 \begin_layout Enumerate
10201 This is level #1, in an
10205 paragraph environment.
10206 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
10210 \begin_layout Enumerate
10215 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10221 arg "depth-increment"
10225 Now, what happens if we nest an
10229 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
10230 label be? An asterisk?
10234 \begin_layout Itemize
10244 environment, even though it's at level #3.
10245 So, its label is a bullet.
10246 (We got here by using
10249 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10255 arg "depth-increment"
10258 , then changing the environment to
10266 \begin_layout Itemize
10267 Here's level #4, produced using
10270 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10276 arg "depth-increment"
10280 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10285 \begin_layout Enumerate
10287 to get to level #5.
10288 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10293 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10297 , because we are in the
10305 environment (that is, it is an
10320 \begin_layout Enumerate
10325 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10326 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10330 \begin_layout Enumerate
10331 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10334 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10337 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10340 \begin_layout Enumerate
10344 arg "depth-decrement"
10347 to decrease the depth after the next
10350 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10357 \begin_layout Enumerate
10359 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10364 \begin_layout Enumerate
10366 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10367 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10371 \begin_layout Enumerate
10372 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10381 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10386 reset the counter for the label.
10390 \begin_layout Enumerate
10394 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10400 arg "depth-decrement"
10403 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10404 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10405 into the twofold-nested
10413 \begin_layout Enumerate
10414 The same thing happens if we do another
10417 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10423 arg "depth-decrement"
10426 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10429 \begin_layout Standard
10430 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10435 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10446 The number of other
10450 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10457 The same rule applies for the
10461 environment, as well.
10464 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10465 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10468 \begin_layout Enumerate
10469 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10470 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10471 the same detail with how we did it.
10480 \begin_layout Standard
10488 arg "depth-increment"
10495 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10496 the example in parentheses someplace.
10497 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10498 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10499 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10503 \begin_layout Enumerate
10508 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10512 \begin_layout Verse
10513 Now we will add verse.
10514 \begin_inset Newline newline
10517 It will get much worse.
10518 \begin_inset Newline newline
10528 arg "depth-increment"
10538 \begin_layout Verse
10539 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10540 \begin_inset Newline newline
10543 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10544 \begin_inset Newline newline
10550 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10558 \begin_layout Verse
10559 Here comes a table:
10563 \begin_layout Standard
10564 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10570 \begin_layout Standard
10572 \begin_inset Tabular
10573 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10574 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10575 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10576 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10661 \begin_layout Verse
10665 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10675 arg "depth-increment"
10681 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10687 \begin_inset Newline newline
10695 arg "depth-decrement"
10702 \begin_layout Enumerate
10707 : level #1) This is another item.
10708 Note that selecting a
10712 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10713 3 times to put the table inside the
10720 \begin_layout Quotation
10721 We're now ending the
10725 list and changing to
10730 We're still at level #1.
10731 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10732 The next set of paragraphs is a
10733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10740 We will nest both the
10747 \begin_inset space ~
10752 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10756 for the letter body.
10760 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10763 to preserve the depth.
10764 Remember that you need to use
10767 arg "newline-insert newline"
10770 to create multiple lines inside the
10777 \begin_inset space ~
10787 \begin_layout Right Address
10789 \begin_inset Newline newline
10792 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10793 \begin_inset Newline newline
10799 \begin_layout Address
10801 \begin_inset space ~
10807 \begin_layout Quotation
10808 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10809 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10812 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10813 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10814 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10815 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10816 as soon as possible.
10817 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10820 \begin_layout Quotation
10821 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10822 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10823 with your order, along with payment.
10826 \begin_layout Quotation
10827 We thank you again for your patience.
10830 \begin_layout Address
10832 \begin_inset Newline newline
10839 \begin_layout Quotation
10840 That ends that example!
10843 \begin_layout Standard
10844 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10845 gives you a lot of power with just
10847 We could have easily nested an
10868 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10871 \begin_layout Subsection
10873 \begin_inset Index idx
10876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10877 Nesting ! Separation
10883 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10885 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10892 \begin_layout Standard
10893 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10895 For example you need two different enumerations:
10898 \begin_layout Enumerate
10903 \begin_layout Enumerate
10908 \begin_layout Enumerate
10912 \begin_layout Standard
10913 \begin_inset Separator plain
10919 \begin_layout Itemize
10925 \begin_layout Standard
10926 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10932 \begin_layout Enumerate
10936 \begin_layout Enumerate
10940 \begin_layout Enumerate
10944 \begin_layout Standard
10945 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10946 list item and use the menu
10948 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10949 Separated <Name> Above
10953 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10954 Separated <Name> Below
10957 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10958 ) and before or behind it the
10960 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10963 \begin_layout Standard
10964 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10965 (red arrow in LyX).
10966 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10967 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10970 \begin_layout Standard
10971 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10974 arg "paragraph-break"
10981 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10984 \begin_layout Section
10985 Spacing, Pagination and Line Breaks
10986 \begin_inset Index idx
10989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10998 \begin_layout Standard
10999 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
11000 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
11002 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
11003 be broken at the end of a line.
11004 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
11008 \begin_layout Subsection
11010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11012 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
11017 \begin_inset Index idx
11020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11029 \begin_layout Standard
11030 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
11031 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
11032 ) not to break the line at
11034 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
11037 \begin_layout Quote
11038 Further documentation is given in section
11039 \begin_inset Newline newline
11043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11045 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11052 \begin_layout Standard
11053 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
11054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11068 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11077 A protected space is set with
11079 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11080 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11082 \begin_inset space ~
11090 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
11096 \begin_layout Subsection
11098 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11100 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11105 \begin_inset Index idx
11108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11109 Spacing ! Horizontal
11117 \begin_layout Standard
11118 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
11120 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11121 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11125 The length units are listed in Appendix
11126 \begin_inset space ~
11130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11132 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11139 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11141 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11143 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
11148 \begin_inset Index idx
11151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11152 Spaces ! Inter-word
11160 \begin_layout Standard
11161 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
11162 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
11163 at the ends of sentences.
11164 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
11165 automatically takes care about this.
11166 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
11167 followed by a period; see section
11168 \begin_inset space ~
11172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11174 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
11179 To insert a normal space, select
11181 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11182 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11184 \begin_inset space ~
11192 arg "space-insert normal"
11198 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11200 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11202 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
11207 \begin_inset Index idx
11210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11219 \begin_layout Standard
11221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11228 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
11229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11237 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
11238 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
11239 inside abbreviations:
11242 \begin_layout Quote
11244 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11248 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
11251 \begin_layout Standard
11252 or between values and units.
11253 Compare for example this:
11254 \begin_inset Newline newline
11258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11262 \begin_inset Newline newline
11265 10 kg (normal space
11268 \begin_layout Standard
11269 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11271 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11272 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11274 \begin_inset space ~
11282 arg "space-insert thin"
11288 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11292 \begin_layout Standard
11293 You can also insert the following space types:
11296 \begin_layout Description
11298 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
11300 \begin_inset space ~
11306 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11310 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
11314 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11318 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
11320 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
11323 space between the arrows.
11324 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
11328 \begin_layout Description
11330 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
11332 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
11336 \begin_inset space ~
11339 space A line with a
11340 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11344 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
11348 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11352 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
11354 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
11357 space between the arrows.
11360 \begin_layout Description
11362 \begin_inset space ~
11366 \begin_inset space ~
11369 space A line with a
11370 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11374 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11378 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11381 negative thin space between the arrows.
11384 \begin_layout Description
11386 \begin_inset space ~
11390 \begin_inset space ~
11393 space A line with a
11394 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11398 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11402 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11405 negative medium space between the arrows.
11408 \begin_layout Description
11410 \begin_inset space ~
11414 \begin_inset space ~
11417 space A line with a
11418 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11422 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11426 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11429 negative thick space between the arrows.
11432 \begin_layout Description
11434 \begin_inset space ~
11438 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11442 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11446 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11450 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11454 \begin_inset space ~
11458 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11461 em) space between the arrows.
11464 \begin_layout Description
11466 \begin_inset space ~
11470 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11474 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11478 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11482 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11486 \begin_inset space ~
11490 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11493 em) space between the arrows.
11496 \begin_layout Description
11498 \begin_inset space ~
11502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11506 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11510 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11514 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11518 \begin_inset space ~
11522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11525 em) space between the arrows.
11528 \begin_layout Description
11530 \begin_inset space ~
11534 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11538 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11543 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11547 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11550 cm space between the arrows.
11553 \begin_layout Standard
11555 \begin_inset space ~
11559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11561 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11565 lists the different space sizes.
11568 \begin_layout Standard
11569 \begin_inset Float table
11576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11577 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11580 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11582 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11586 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11596 \begin_inset Tabular
11597 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
11598 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11599 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11600 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11640 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11664 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11688 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11697 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11703 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11714 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11716 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11725 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11731 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11742 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11744 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11768 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11772 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11776 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11800 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11824 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11839 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11852 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11867 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11880 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11895 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11908 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11929 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11931 \begin_inset Index idx
11934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11943 \begin_layout Standard
11944 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11945 feature for adding extra space
11946 in a uniform fashion.
11947 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11948 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11949 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11950 equally between themselves.
11953 \begin_layout Standard
11954 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11957 \begin_layout Quote
11959 This is on the left side
11960 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11963 This is on the right
11966 \begin_layout Quote
11969 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11973 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11979 \begin_layout Quote
11982 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11986 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11990 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11996 \begin_layout Standard
11997 That was an example in the
12003 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12007 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12011 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12014 is one in a standard paragraph.
12015 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
12019 sitting in-between the two arrows.
12022 \begin_layout Standard
12023 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
12026 \begin_inset space ~
12031 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
12034 \begin_layout Standard
12036 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
12040 \begin_inset space ~
12046 \begin_layout Standard
12048 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
12052 \begin_inset space ~
12058 \begin_layout Standard
12060 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
12064 \begin_inset space ~
12070 \begin_layout Standard
12072 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
12076 \begin_inset space ~
12082 \begin_layout Standard
12084 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
12086 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
12090 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
12091 (= opened downwards)
12094 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
12098 \begin_inset space ~
12104 \begin_layout Standard
12106 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
12108 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
12112 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
12116 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
12120 \begin_inset space ~
12126 \begin_layout Standard
12127 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12135 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
12139 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
12141 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
12142 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
12146 option in the space dialog.
12154 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12156 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12158 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
12163 \begin_inset Index idx
12166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12175 \begin_layout Standard
12176 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
12177 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
12180 \begin_layout Standard
12181 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12184 What is correct English?:
12185 \begin_inset Newline newline
12189 \begin_inset Newline newline
12193 \begin_inset space ~
12196 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
12197 \begin_inset Newline newline
12201 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12212 \begin_inset Newline newline
12216 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12227 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12233 \begin_layout Standard
12235 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
12236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12240 \begin_inset space ~
12244 \begin_inset space ~
12248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12252 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
12254 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12255 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12259 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
12261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12265 \begin_inset space ~
12269 \begin_inset space ~
12273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12276 into the phantom inset (note the space after
12277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12285 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
12286 That is why it is named
12287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12295 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
12296 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
12300 \begin_layout Subsection
12302 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12304 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
12309 \begin_inset Index idx
12312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12321 \begin_layout Standard
12322 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
12324 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12325 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12327 \begin_inset space ~
12333 There you find the following sizes:
12336 \begin_layout Standard
12349 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
12350 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
12355 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
12357 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12358 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
12360 \begin_inset space ~
12366 \begin_inset Index idx
12369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12370 Document ! Settings
12375 for the paragraph separation.
12376 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
12385 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
12389 \begin_layout Standard
12391 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
12400 equal to the height, or half the height, of a line in the current font
12401 size including line spacing.
12406 \begin_layout Standard
12412 \begin_inset Index idx
12415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12421 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12422 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12427 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12428 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12437 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12446 s are described in section
12447 \begin_inset space ~
12451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12453 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12462 If there are several
12466 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12467 You can therefore use
12471 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12474 \begin_layout Standard
12479 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12480 \begin_inset space ~
12484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12486 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12493 \begin_layout Standard
12494 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12504 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12505 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12517 \begin_layout Subsection
12518 Paragraph Alignment
12519 \begin_inset Index idx
12522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12523 Paragraph ! Alignment
12531 \begin_layout Standard
12532 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12534 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12537 dialog (toolbar button
12540 arg "layout-paragraph"
12544 There are five possibilities:
12547 \begin_layout Itemize
12555 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12561 \begin_layout Itemize
12569 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12575 \begin_layout Itemize
12583 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12589 \begin_layout Itemize
12597 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12603 \begin_layout Itemize
12611 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12617 \begin_layout Standard
12618 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12619 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12620 the left and right margins.
12621 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12624 \begin_layout Standard
12626 This paragraph is right aligned,
12629 \begin_layout Standard
12631 this one is centered,
12634 \begin_layout Standard
12636 this one is left aligned.
12639 \begin_layout Subsection
12641 \begin_inset Index idx
12644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12645 Page breaks ! Forced
12651 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12653 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12660 \begin_layout Standard
12661 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12662 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12663 force a page break where you want one.
12664 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12665 is good at page breaking.
12666 Only if you use a lot of
12670 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12671 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12674 \begin_layout Standard
12675 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12676 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12680 have to change the page breaking.
12683 \begin_layout Standard
12684 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12686 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12688 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12689 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12691 \begin_inset space ~
12697 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12699 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12700 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12702 \begin_inset space ~
12707 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12709 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12710 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12713 \begin_layout Standard
12714 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12715 at the top of a page.
12716 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12718 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12719 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12720 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12724 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12728 to learn more about
12735 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12739 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12744 \begin_inset Index idx
12747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12748 Page breaks ! Clear
12756 \begin_layout Standard
12757 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12758 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12759 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12760 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12761 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12764 \begin_layout Standard
12765 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12767 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12768 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12770 \begin_inset space ~
12776 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12778 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12779 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12781 \begin_inset space ~
12785 \begin_inset space ~
12790 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12791 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12792 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706231
12796 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12798 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706295
12799 Suppressing Page Breaks
12802 \begin_inset Index idx
12805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12807 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706382
12811 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706335
12820 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706444
12824 \begin_layout Standard
12826 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
12827 To discourage page break at certain point you can use
12831 \SpecialChar menuseparator
12833 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706512
12836 \SpecialChar menuseparator
12838 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706556
12845 \change_inserted 5863208 1602707015
12846 This is typically useful for paragraphs which should stay together or when
12847 you want to keep close the description for tables and pictures in case
12848 using floats or boxes is not appropriate.
12853 \begin_layout Subsection
12855 \begin_inset Index idx
12858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12865 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12867 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12874 \begin_layout Standard
12875 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12877 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12879 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12880 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12882 \begin_inset space ~
12886 \begin_inset space ~
12894 arg "newline-insert newline"
12898 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12900 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12901 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12903 \begin_inset space ~
12907 \begin_inset space ~
12915 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12918 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12920 This is useful to avoid
12921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12928 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12931 \begin_layout Standard
12932 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12933 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12935 very good at line breaking.
12936 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12937 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12938 \begin_inset space ~
12942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12944 reference "sec:Quote"
12949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12951 reference "sec:Verse"
12956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12958 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12965 \begin_layout Subsection
12967 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12969 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12974 \begin_inset Index idx
12977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12986 \begin_layout Standard
12988 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12999 \begin_layout Standard
13003 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13004 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13006 \begin_inset space ~
13011 you can insert horizontal lines.
13012 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
13013 of the current text line or the paragraph.
13014 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
13017 \begin_layout Standard
13019 \begin_inset CommandInset line
13030 \begin_layout Section
13031 Characters and Symbols
13034 \begin_layout Standard
13035 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
13036 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
13037 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
13039 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13045 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
13049 for information on how this is done.
13052 \begin_layout Standard
13053 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
13058 dialog via the menu
13060 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13061 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
13067 \begin_layout Standard
13068 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13076 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
13077 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
13079 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
13087 \begin_layout Section
13088 Fonts and Text Styles
13089 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13091 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
13098 \begin_layout Subsection
13100 \begin_inset Index idx
13103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13112 \begin_layout Standard
13113 There are two types of fonts:
13116 \begin_layout Description
13118 \begin_inset space ~
13122 \begin_inset Index idx
13125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13131 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
13132 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13136 characters) in the font.
13137 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
13138 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
13139 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
13140 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
13141 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
13142 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
13143 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
13144 \begin_inset Newline newline
13147 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
13148 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
13149 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
13150 sizes than at small ones.
13151 \begin_inset Newline newline
13165 \begin_inset space ~
13173 \begin_layout Description
13175 \begin_inset space ~
13179 \begin_inset Index idx
13182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13188 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
13189 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
13190 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
13191 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
13192 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
13193 image manipulation program.
13194 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
13195 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
13196 \begin_inset space ~
13199 pixels high up to 34
13200 \begin_inset space ~
13203 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
13204 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
13205 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
13207 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
13208 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
13209 \begin_inset Newline newline
13212 Bitmap fonts are named
13215 \begin_inset space ~
13220 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
13223 \begin_layout Standard
13224 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
13225 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
13226 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
13227 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
13228 use scalable fonts.
13231 \begin_layout Standard
13232 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
13235 \begin_layout Standard
13236 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
13238 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
13240 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
13243 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
13244 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
13245 font, to emphasize text you use an
13246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13254 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
13256 In \SpecialChar LyX
13257 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
13261 \begin_layout Subsection
13264 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13266 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13273 \begin_layout Standard
13274 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
13275 used its own fonts.
13276 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
13277 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13280 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13281 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
13282 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
13283 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
13284 to a word processor.
13285 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
13286 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13287 files are very portable across
13288 different machines.
13289 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
13290 has increased a lot
13291 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
13294 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
13296 \begin_inset space ~
13300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13302 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
13307 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
13308 code in the document
13309 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
13312 \begin_layout Standard
13313 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
13314 engines that are also able directly
13315 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13317 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13319 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
13321 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
13322 that is installed on your system.
13323 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
13326 \begin_layout Standard
13327 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13335 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
13336 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
13344 \begin_layout Subsection
13345 Document Font and Font size
13346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13348 name "subsec:Document-Font"
13353 \begin_inset Index idx
13356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13363 \begin_inset Index idx
13366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13375 \begin_layout Standard
13376 You can set the document fonts in the
13378 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13382 \begin_inset Index idx
13385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13386 Document ! Settings
13396 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
13397 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
13400 \begin_inset space ~
13409 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
13411 \begin_inset space ~
13414 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
13417 \begin_layout Standard
13422 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
13423 This requires that you use
13435 as the output format, i.
13436 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13440 \begin_inset space \space{}
13443 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13444 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13445 installed (see section
13446 \begin_inset space ~
13450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13452 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13457 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
13459 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
13460 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
13462 \begin_inset space ~
13465 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
13466 cannot determine the family.
13467 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
13468 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
13471 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
13474 \begin_layout Standard
13475 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
13476 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
13481 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13487 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13489 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13491 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13494 font encoding, this is
13495 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13496 , depending on the document language,
13499 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13500 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13508 \begin_inset space ~
13514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13524 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13525 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13533 \begin_inset space ~
13539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13547 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13568 European Computer Modern
13571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13579 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13582 \begin_layout Standard
13587 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13588 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13593 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13596 \begin_inset space ~
13601 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13607 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13608 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13611 \begin_layout Itemize
13615 \begin_inset space ~
13620 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13633 \begin_inset space ~
13638 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13639 community in order to replace
13643 as the default font.
13644 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13645 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13648 \begin_inset space ~
13661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13662 One difference is improved kerning.
13670 \begin_layout Itemize
13671 If you do not like the look of
13679 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13680 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13684 \begin_inset space ~
13690 \begin_inset space ~
13700 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13701 \begin_inset space ~
13704 serif and typewriter fonts,
13708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13709 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13710 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13716 \begin_inset space ~
13725 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13726 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13730 \begin_inset space \space{}
13738 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13742 \begin_inset space \space{}
13748 \begin_inset space ~
13756 \begin_inset space ~
13766 but you can also select your own.
13767 \begin_inset Newline newline
13770 The differences between roman,
13773 \begin_inset space ~
13782 fonts are explained in section
13783 \begin_inset space ~
13787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13789 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13794 \begin_inset Newline newline
13800 \begin_inset space ~
13805 was originally designed for newspapers.
13806 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13807 into the small newspaper columns.
13811 \begin_inset space ~
13816 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13819 \begin_layout Standard
13820 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13833 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13838 depends on the class you are using.
13839 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13842 \begin_layout Standard
13843 Note that the font size is the
13848 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13849 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13850 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13851 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13854 \begin_inset space ~
13860 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13861 \begin_inset space ~
13865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13867 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13874 \begin_layout Standard
13878 \begin_inset space ~
13883 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13885 \begin_inset space ~
13888 serif or typewriter.
13893 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13903 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13906 \begin_layout Standard
13911 LaTeX font encoding
13913 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13914 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13920 \begin_inset Index idx
13923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13931 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13933 \begin_inset space ~
13937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13939 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13946 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13947 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13948 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13952 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13960 \begin_layout Standard
13961 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13963 Use Old Style Figures
13967 Use True Small Caps
13970 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13973 Use Old Style Figures
13975 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13977 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13978 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13982 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13985 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13989 Use True Small Caps
13991 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13992 of scaled capitals.
13993 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13994 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13995 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
13999 \begin_layout Standard
14001 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
14002 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
14003 provided by the font package (or the
14007 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
14012 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
14018 \begin_layout Standard
14023 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
14024 a font to display the script characters.
14028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14029 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14035 \begin_inset Index idx
14038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14045 So this has no effect for the document language
14061 \begin_layout Standard
14064 Enable micro-typographic extensions
14066 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
14067 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14073 \begin_inset Index idx
14076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14078 packages ! microtype
14087 \begin_layout Standard
14090 Disallow line breaks after dashes
14092 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
14096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14097 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14098 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14104 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
14105 \begin_inset space ~
14109 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14111 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
14121 \begin_layout Standard
14122 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
14126 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14134 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
14139 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
14140 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
14142 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
14144 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
14147 dialog, see section
14148 \begin_inset space ~
14152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14154 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
14166 \begin_layout Subsection
14170 \begin_layout Standard
14171 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
14172 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
14174 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
14175 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
14176 choose a math font in the dialog
14178 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14182 \begin_inset Index idx
14185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14186 Document ! Settings
14192 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
14193 automatically selects a math font.
14194 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
14195 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
14198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14204 \begin_inset space ~
14210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14215 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
14216 document font is available.
14219 \begin_layout Standard
14220 Note that the math font will not be used for
14224 (which is inserted with the shortcut
14230 or by the insertion of the command
14237 Also note that some math fonts are sans
14238 \begin_inset space ~
14242 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
14243 while the math characters do not.
14245 \begin_inset space ~
14248 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
14251 \begin_inset space ~
14259 \begin_inset space ~
14264 in the document font settings.
14267 \begin_layout Standard
14268 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
14269 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
14270 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
14271 font (in most cases
14272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14278 \begin_inset space ~
14284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14287 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
14288 variant of the document's class default font (in most
14290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14296 \begin_inset space ~
14302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14308 \begin_layout Subsection
14310 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
14312 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
14316 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
14318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14320 name "subsec:charstyles"
14327 \begin_inset Index idx
14330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14337 \begin_inset Index idx
14340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14349 \begin_layout Standard
14350 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
14351 automatically changes the
14352 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
14355 style for certain paragraph environments.
14357 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
14358 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
14360 This is where we meet the concept of
14366 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
14368 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
14372 \begin_layout Standard
14374 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
14379 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
14381 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
14394 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
14400 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14403 e., available with all document classes.
14404 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
14408 for specific purposes.
14409 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
14412 \begin_layout Standard
14414 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
14415 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
14425 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
14429 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
14430 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14442 — you customized the
14447 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
14448 among them, encourage the use of
14460 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
14461 \begin_inset space ~
14465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14467 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14472 Rather than fiddling with
14476 , they encourage the use of
14480 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
14481 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14485 \begin_inset Quotes els
14489 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14492 ), not their form (
14493 \begin_inset Quotes els
14497 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14501 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14502 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14503 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14504 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14505 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14506 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14512 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14516 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14517 With a semantic markup (such as
14521 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14526 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14528 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14529 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14532 \begin_layout Standard
14534 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14535 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14536 by \SpecialChar LyX
14542 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14544 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14545 Builtin Text Styles
14546 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14548 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14555 \begin_layout Standard
14557 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14558 The two builtin text styles can be
14559 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14563 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14567 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14568 both of these styles
14571 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14579 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14585 \begin_layout Standard
14590 style, do one of the following:
14593 \begin_layout Itemize
14594 click on the toolbar button
14603 \begin_layout Itemize
14604 use the key binding
14611 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14615 \begin_layout Itemize
14617 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14625 arg "dialog-show character"
14631 arg "dialog-show character"
14634 ) as described in section
14635 \begin_inset space ~
14639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14641 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14650 \begin_layout Standard
14651 These commands are all toggles.
14656 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14659 \begin_layout Standard
14660 One typically uses the
14664 style for proper names.
14666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14673 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14679 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14683 \begin_layout Standard
14685 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14690 is producing text in
14694 , but the definition can be changed.
14699 \begin_layout Standard
14701 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14703 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14711 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14718 \begin_layout Itemize
14719 clicking on the toolbar button
14728 \begin_layout Itemize
14729 using the keybindings
14736 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14740 \begin_layout Itemize
14742 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14750 arg "dialog-show character"
14756 arg "dialog-show character"
14759 ) as described in section
14760 \begin_inset space ~
14764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14766 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14775 \begin_layout Standard
14780 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14782 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14784 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14787 packages use a different font
14788 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14789 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14795 \begin_layout Standard
14796 We've been using the
14800 style all over the place in this document.
14801 Here's one more example:
14804 \begin_layout Quotation
14808 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14810 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14816 \begin_layout Standard
14817 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14818 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14819 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14820 the common tendency to overuse
14821 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14823 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14828 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
14830 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14834 \begin_layout Standard
14836 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14837 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14838 only as font changes and integrated in the
14846 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14849 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14856 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14858 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14862 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14865 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14867 \begin_inset space ~
14870 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14872 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14878 arg "dialog-show character"
14884 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14886 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14892 arg "dialog-show character"
14896 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14900 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14902 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14904 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14906 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14913 \begin_layout Standard
14915 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14916 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14918 \begin_inset space ~
14922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14924 reference "subsec:Modules"
14931 ), or local layout settings (see section
14932 \begin_inset space ~
14936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14938 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14943 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14947 markup for specific functions.
14948 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14953 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14963 \begin_inset Quotes els
14967 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14973 \begin_layout Standard
14975 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14976 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14978 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14984 \begin_layout Standard
14986 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14987 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14992 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14993 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14994 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14999 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
15000 \begin_inset Flex Emph
15003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15005 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
15013 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
15014 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
15015 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
15016 \begin_inset Flex Code
15019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15021 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
15030 \begin_inset Flex Strong
15033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15035 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
15044 \begin_inset Flex Noun
15047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15049 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
15058 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
15059 on screen their formal appearance.
15064 \begin_layout Subsection
15066 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
15068 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
15072 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
15078 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
15080 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
15086 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
15088 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
15092 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15094 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15099 \begin_inset Index idx
15102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15111 \begin_layout Standard
15112 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
15113 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
15116 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
15118 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
15120 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
15124 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
15125 the properties of text passages
15126 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
15130 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
15131 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
15132 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
15133 from ordinary dialog.
15134 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
15138 \begin_layout Standard
15140 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
15141 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
15142 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
15143 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
15144 the properties of the respective text passages.
15149 comes in as a last resort.
15154 \begin_layout Standard
15155 Before we document how to
15156 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
15157 use custom character style
15158 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
15159 tweak the text properties
15161 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
15162 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
15164 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
15168 \begin_inset Newline newline
15171 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
15172 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
15175 \begin_layout Standard
15177 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
15178 use custom character styles
15179 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
15180 tweak text properties
15183 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
15186 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15188 \begin_inset space ~
15191 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15193 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
15199 arg "dialog-show character"
15204 dialog or press the toolbar button
15207 arg "dialog-show character"
15212 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
15215 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
15216 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
15218 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
15221 property that you can choose.
15222 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
15225 \begin_inset space ~
15230 , which keeps the current state of that property.
15232 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
15236 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
15238 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
15243 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
15244 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
15245 environments all at once.
15248 \begin_layout Standard
15250 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
15252 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
15255 properties, and their options (in addition to
15258 \begin_inset space ~
15264 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
15268 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
15276 \begin_layout Labeling
15277 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15291 The possible options are:
15295 \begin_layout Labeling
15296 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15301 This is the Roman font family.
15302 Normally a serif font.
15303 It's also the default family.
15313 \begin_layout Labeling
15314 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15318 \begin_inset space ~
15325 This is the Sans Serif font family.
15337 \begin_layout Labeling
15338 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15345 This is the Typewriter font family.
15351 arg "font-typewriter"
15357 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
15361 \begin_layout Standard
15363 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
15364 The general differences of these families are:
15367 \begin_layout Itemize
15369 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
15374 fonts use characters with serifs.
15375 These are the small
15376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15383 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15384 The following example shows the difference:
15385 \begin_inset Newline newline
15389 \begin_inset Newline newline
15394 text without serifs
15397 \begin_inset Newline newline
15400 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15401 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15408 \begin_layout Itemize
15410 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15415 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15416 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15417 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15420 \begin_layout Itemize
15422 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15435 font, which means every character has the same width; the
15436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15453 \begin_inset Newline newline
15457 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15462 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15475 \begin_inset Note Note
15478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15480 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15481 For more on phantoms see section
15482 \begin_inset space ~
15486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15488 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15498 \begin_inset Newline newline
15507 \begin_layout Labeling
15508 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15513 This corresponds to the print weight.
15518 \begin_layout Labeling
15519 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15524 This is the Medium font series.
15525 It's also the default series.
15528 \begin_layout Labeling
15529 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15536 This is the Bold font series.
15549 \begin_layout Labeling
15550 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15555 As the name implies.
15560 \begin_layout Labeling
15561 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15566 This is the Upright font shape.
15567 It's also the default shape.
15570 \begin_layout Labeling
15571 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15581 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15586 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15591 s the Italic font shape
15597 \begin_layout Labeling
15598 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15605 This is the Slanted font shape
15607 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15608 , this is different from italic).
15611 \begin_layout Labeling
15612 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15616 \begin_inset space ~
15623 This is the Small caps font shape
15630 \begin_layout Labeling
15631 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15636 Alters the text color.
15637 Note that not all DVI
15638 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15640 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15643 viewers are able to display colors.
15645 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15649 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15651 \begin_inset space ~
15658 , which means that the document default color set in
15660 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15661 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15667 \begin_inset space ~
15673 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15675 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15679 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15759 \begin_inset Index idx
15762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15769 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
15775 \begin_layout Labeling
15776 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15781 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15782 the language of the document.
15783 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15784 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15785 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15788 in blue to indicate the change
15789 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15790 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15794 \begin_inset Newline newline
15797 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15799 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15800 When using the spell checking (see section
15801 \begin_inset space ~
15805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15807 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15811 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15812 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15814 \begin_inset Newline newline
15817 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15819 Exclude from Spellchecking
15822 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15825 \begin_layout Labeling
15826 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15831 Alters the size of the font.
15833 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15835 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15839 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15842 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15843 document font size.
15844 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15845 the details, but a general description of what
15851 \begin_layout Labeling
15852 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15873 arg "font-size tiny"
15879 \begin_layout Labeling
15880 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15901 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15907 \begin_layout Labeling
15908 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15929 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15935 \begin_layout Labeling
15936 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15957 arg "font-size small"
15963 \begin_layout Labeling
15964 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15978 It's also the default size.
15982 arg "font-size normal"
15988 \begin_layout Labeling
15989 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16010 arg "font-size large"
16016 \begin_layout Labeling
16017 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16038 arg "font-size larger"
16044 \begin_layout Labeling
16045 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16066 arg "font-size largest"
16072 \begin_layout Labeling
16073 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16094 arg "font-size huge"
16100 \begin_layout Labeling
16101 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16122 arg "font-size giant"
16128 \begin_layout Labeling
16129 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16134 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
16135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16154 arg "font-size increase"
16160 \begin_layout Labeling
16161 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16166 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
16167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16186 arg "font-size decrease"
16193 \begin_layout Standard
16198 : don't go crazy with this feature.
16199 You should almost never need to change the font size.
16201 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
16202 — use those instead.
16203 This is here for fine-tuning only!
16206 \begin_layout Labeling
16207 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16209 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
16213 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
16219 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
16220 change a few other things at the character level
16221 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
16222 have text passages being underlined
16226 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
16227 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
16228 days, when you could not change fonts.
16229 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16230 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16231 because some people
16235 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16242 \begin_layout Labeling
16243 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16245 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
16252 This is text with emphasize on
16255 This might seem like the same as
16259 , but it is actually a bit different.
16265 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
16267 Normally this font is equal to italic.
16268 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
16272 \begin_layout Labeling
16273 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16275 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
16280 Don't use underlining.
16285 \begin_layout Labeling
16286 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16288 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
16292 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
16300 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
16302 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
16311 arg "font-underline"
16317 \begin_inset Newline newline
16321 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
16324 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
16325 when you could not change fonts.
16326 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16327 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16328 because some people
16332 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16337 \begin_layout Labeling
16338 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16342 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
16344 \begin_inset space ~
16353 This is text with Double under
16354 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
16356 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
16365 arg "font-underunderline"
16369 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
16371 \begin_inset Newline newline
16374 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
16375 about double underbar
16380 \begin_layout Labeling
16381 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16385 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
16387 \begin_inset space ~
16396 This is text with Wavy under
16397 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
16399 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
16408 arg "font-underwave"
16412 \begin_inset Newline newline
16415 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
16416 Keep antinausea pills handy.
16417 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
16422 \begin_layout Labeling
16423 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16425 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
16430 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
16436 \begin_layout Labeling
16437 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16439 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
16444 Don't use strikethrough.
16447 \begin_layout Labeling
16448 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16452 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
16454 \begin_inset space ~
16458 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
16466 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
16468 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
16469 Single strikethrough
16477 arg "font-strikeout"
16481 \begin_inset Newline newline
16484 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
16485 changed in the meantime.
16488 \begin_layout Labeling
16489 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16491 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16495 \begin_inset space ~
16499 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16501 \begin_inset space ~
16505 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16513 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16515 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16521 \begin_inset Newline newline
16524 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16528 \begin_layout Standard
16530 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
16531 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
16532 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
16533 \begin_inset space ~
16537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16539 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16546 \begin_layout Itemize
16548 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
16555 This is text with emphasize on
16560 \begin_layout Itemize
16564 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16571 This is text with Noun on.
16573 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16580 , this is a logical attribute.
16581 Normally it's equivalent to
16584 \begin_inset space ~
16594 \begin_layout Standard
16595 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16596 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16598 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16603 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16604 chosen a new character style
16605 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16606 applied a text property
16609 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16612 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16614 \begin_inset space ~
16617 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16619 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16625 arg "dialog-show character"
16633 arg "dialog-show character"
16636 ) dialog, the settings are
16637 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16641 You can activate the
16642 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16644 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16645 last applied properties
16647 by using the toolbar button
16650 arg "textstyle-apply"
16654 The button lets you apply
16655 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16656 your custom character style
16657 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16660 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16662 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16663 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16664 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16665 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16670 \begin_layout Standard
16671 To completely reset the
16672 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16674 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16675 text properties of a selection
16677 to the default, use
16678 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16680 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16690 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16695 from the menu of the toolbar button
16698 arg "textstyle-apply"
16705 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16706 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16707 you just set the shape to
16708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16726 \begin_inset space ~
16740 \begin_layout Standard
16742 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16743 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16751 \begin_inset space ~
16763 \begin_layout Itemize
16765 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16778 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16796 \begin_inset Newline newline
16800 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16814 \begin_inset Note Note
16817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16818 For more on phantoms see section
16819 \begin_inset space ~
16823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16825 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16835 \begin_inset Newline newline
16841 \begin_layout Itemize
16843 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16848 fonts use characters with serifs.
16849 These are the small
16850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16857 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16858 The following example shows the difference:
16859 \begin_inset Newline newline
16863 \begin_inset Newline newline
16868 text without serifs
16871 \begin_inset Newline newline
16874 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16875 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16882 \begin_layout Itemize
16884 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16889 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16890 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16891 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16896 \begin_layout Standard
16898 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16906 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16907 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16910 \begin_inset space ~
16915 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16916 the property to be removed.
16917 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16918 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16919 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16937 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16938 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16946 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16950 \begin_inset space ~
16955 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16966 If you, for example, set
16967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16985 \begin_inset space ~
16990 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16999 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
17004 \begin_layout Standard
17006 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
17009 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
17010 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
17013 \begin_layout Section
17014 Printing and Previewing
17017 \begin_layout Subsection
17021 \begin_layout Standard
17022 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
17023 using \SpecialChar LyX
17024 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
17025 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
17026 goes on behind-the-scenes.
17027 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
17029 Additional Features
17034 \begin_layout Standard
17036 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
17039 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
17040 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
17041 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17044 is what you use to do your actual writing.
17045 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
17046 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17047 to turn your writing into printable output.
17048 This happens in two stages:
17051 \begin_layout Enumerate
17052 First, \SpecialChar LyX
17053 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
17055 a file with the extension,
17056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17070 \begin_layout Enumerate
17071 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
17072 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17073 to use the commands in the
17077 file to produce printable output.
17080 \begin_layout Subsection
17081 Output file formats
17082 \begin_inset Index idx
17085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17092 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17094 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17101 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17103 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337594
17105 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337596
17109 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337574
17113 \begin_inset Index idx
17116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17118 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337607
17120 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337612
17131 \begin_layout Standard
17132 This file type has the extension
17133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17145 It contains your document as plain text
17146 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337643
17148 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337647
17149 following the rules of the
17150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17153 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
17154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17162 \begin_layout Standard
17163 You can export your document to
17164 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337684
17166 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337686
17171 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17172 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17174 \begin_inset space ~
17180 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
17181 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
17182 bibliography (section
17183 \begin_inset space ~
17187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17189 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
17194 If your document includes such material, use
17196 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17197 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17199 \begin_inset space ~
17203 \begin_inset space ~
17207 \begin_inset space ~
17215 \begin_inset space ~
17219 \begin_inset space ~
17225 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
17226 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to
17227 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337720
17229 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337722
17235 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17238 \begin_inset Index idx
17241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17242 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
17251 \begin_layout Standard
17252 This file type has the extension
17253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17264 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17267 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
17268 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
17269 -Errors or to process it manually
17270 with console commands.
17271 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
17272 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
17273 's temporary directory whenever you
17274 view or export your document.
17277 \begin_layout Standard
17278 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17279 -file using the menu
17281 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17282 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17286 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
17287 export variants are explained in section
17288 \begin_inset space ~
17292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17294 reference "subsec:Export"
17301 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17303 \begin_inset Index idx
17306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17315 \begin_layout Standard
17316 This file type has the extension
17317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17337 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
17338 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
17339 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
17343 \begin_layout Standard
17344 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
17345 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
17346 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
17347 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
17348 when you view the DVI.
17349 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
17352 \begin_layout Standard
17353 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
17355 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17356 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17361 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17362 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17364 \begin_inset space ~
17370 The latter option uses the program
17372 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17378 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17381 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17382 font access (see section
17383 \begin_inset space ~
17387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17389 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17394 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17395 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17400 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17402 \begin_inset Index idx
17405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17406 File formats ! PostScript
17414 \begin_layout Standard
17415 This file type has the extension
17416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17428 PostScript was developed by the company
17432 as a printer language.
17433 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
17435 PostScript can be seen as a
17436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17439 programming language
17440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17443 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
17447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17448 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17455 \begin_inset Index idx
17458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17460 packages ! pstricks
17470 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
17473 \begin_layout Standard
17474 PostScript can only contain images in the format
17475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17478 Encapsulated PostScript
17479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17482 (EPS, file extension
17483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17495 As \SpecialChar LyX
17496 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
17497 convert them in the background to EPS.
17498 If, for example, you have 50
17499 \begin_inset space ~
17502 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
17504 \begin_inset space ~
17507 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
17508 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
17510 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
17511 EPS to avoid this problem.
17514 \begin_layout Standard
17515 You can export to PostScript using the menu
17517 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17518 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17524 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17526 \begin_inset Index idx
17529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17536 \begin_inset Index idx
17539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17548 \begin_layout Standard
17549 This file type has the extension
17550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17566 Portable Document Format
17567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17574 was derived from PostScript.
17575 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
17577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17584 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
17585 looks exactly the same.
17588 \begin_layout Standard
17589 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
17590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17593 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17597 (JPG, file extension
17598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17625 Portable Network Graphics
17626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17629 (PNG, file extension
17630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17642 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17643 converts them in the
17644 background to one of these formats.
17645 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17646 will slow down your workflow.
17647 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17650 \begin_layout Standard
17651 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17653 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17659 \begin_layout Description
17661 \begin_inset space ~
17664 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17668 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17671 \begin_layout Description
17673 \begin_inset space ~
17680 ) This uses the program
17682 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17685 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17688 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17691 is a new engine, derived from
17695 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17696 access (see section
17697 \begin_inset space ~
17701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17703 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17708 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17709 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17714 \begin_layout Description
17716 \begin_inset space ~
17723 ) This uses the program
17728 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17734 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17735 font access (see section
17736 \begin_inset space ~
17740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17742 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17747 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17748 vertically written Japanese.
17751 \begin_layout Description
17753 \begin_inset space ~
17756 (cropped) This is the same as
17759 \begin_inset space ~
17764 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17765 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17766 to generate good-looking
17767 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17770 \begin_layout Description
17772 \begin_inset space ~
17775 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17779 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17783 \begin_layout Description
17785 \begin_inset space ~
17788 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17792 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17793 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17797 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17798 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17801 \begin_layout Standard
17805 \begin_inset space ~
17814 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17815 works without problems.
17816 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17817 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17821 \begin_inset space ~
17829 \begin_inset space ~
17834 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17842 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17844 \begin_inset Index idx
17847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17848 FileFormats ! XHTML
17854 \begin_inset Index idx
17857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17866 \begin_layout Standard
17867 This file type has the extension
17868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17880 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17881 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17882 When \SpecialChar LyX
17883 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17884 suitable for the purpose.
17885 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17887 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17888 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17891 between different formats, which are described in section
17893 Math Output in XHTML
17898 \begin_inset space ~
17906 \begin_layout Standard
17907 XHTML output remains
17908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17915 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17916 features are supported yet.
17920 and the World Wide Web
17924 Additional Features
17926 manual, for more information.
17929 \begin_layout Standard
17930 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17932 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17933 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17939 \begin_layout Subsection
17941 \begin_inset Index idx
17944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17953 \begin_layout Standard
17954 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17955 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17964 or use the toolbar button
17971 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17972 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17973 \begin_inset space ~
17977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17979 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17983 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17985 \begin_inset space ~
17989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17991 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17996 Further output formats can be selected via
17998 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17999 View (Other Formats)
18001 or the toolbar button
18010 \begin_layout Standard
18011 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
18012 viewer window using the menu
18014 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18019 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18020 Update (Other Formats)
18025 \begin_layout Standard
18026 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
18029 To have a real output, export your document.
18032 \begin_layout Section
18033 A few Words about Typography
18034 \begin_inset Index idx
18037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18046 \begin_layout Subsection
18047 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
18048 \begin_inset Index idx
18051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18058 \begin_inset Index idx
18061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18070 \begin_layout Standard
18071 In \SpecialChar LyX
18073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18084 symbol comes in four variants: the
18101 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18107 \begin_layout Standard
18108 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18118 height_special "totalheight"
18123 backgroundcolor "none"
18126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18127 \begin_inset Tabular
18128 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
18129 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18130 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18131 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18132 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18133 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18134 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18162 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18163 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18202 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18203 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18225 system key combination
18229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18230 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
18233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18242 and the em dash with
18245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18258 is the Mac label for the right
18268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18281 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18282 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18304 system key combination or
18305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18319 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18332 \begin_inset Formula $-$
18340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18371 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18377 \begin_layout Standard
18378 Dashes can also be inserted with
18380 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18382 \begin_inset space ~
18385 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
18393 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
18394 and 2014 for the en dash).
18397 \begin_layout Standard
18398 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
18399 mode and has a length of its own.
18400 Here are some examples:
18403 \begin_layout Enumerate
18404 line- and page-breaks
18405 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18415 \begin_layout Enumerate
18417 \begin_inset space ~
18421 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18431 \begin_layout Enumerate
18432 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
18433 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18443 \begin_layout Enumerate
18444 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
18448 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18458 \begin_layout Standard
18460 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18462 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
18463 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
18471 \begin_layout Subsection
18472 Dashes and Line Breaks
18473 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18475 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
18482 \begin_layout Standard
18483 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
18484 case and locale, e.
18485 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18491 \begin_layout Itemize
18492 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
18493 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
18496 \begin_layout Itemize
18497 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
18501 \begin_layout Itemize
18502 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
18503 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
18506 \begin_layout Standard
18507 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
18508 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18519 allows line breaks after hyphens
18520 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
18522 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
18525 en-dashes and em-dashes.
18528 \begin_layout Enumerate
18529 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
18530 \begin_inset space ~
18533 – common in British English and generally recommended by
18535 The Elements of Typographic Style
18538 \begin_inset space ~
18541 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
18544 \begin_layout Enumerate
18545 Unwanted line breaks
18550 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
18552 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
18555 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
18559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18562 Prevent Hyphenation
18567 \begin_inset space ~
18583 in \SpecialChar TeX
18585 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
18586 , a protected space does not suffice
18590 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
18595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18597 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
18598 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
18599 in the document language.
18600 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
18614 \begin_layout Itemize
18616 \begin_inset space ~
18620 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18630 height_special "totalheight"
18635 backgroundcolor "none"
18638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18647 \begin_layout Itemize
18649 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18659 height_special "totalheight"
18664 backgroundcolor "none"
18667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18669 \begin_inset space ~
18677 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18678 \begin_inset space ~
18681 – sont très utiles.
18684 \begin_layout Itemize
18689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18698 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18702 \begin_layout Standard
18703 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18704 \begin_inset space ~
18707 – in contrast to an overfull line
18708 \begin_inset space ~
18711 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18715 \begin_layout Standard
18716 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18719 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18720 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18721 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18722 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18727 \begin_layout Enumerate
18728 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18729 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18730 or \SpecialChar TeX
18736 \begin_layout Itemize
18738 \begin_inset space ~
18741 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18742 \begin_inset space ~
18745 – sont très utiles.
18749 \begin_layout Enumerate
18750 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18751 \begin_inset Newline newline
18756 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18757 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18759 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
18761 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
18763 \begin_inset space ~
18769 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
18771 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
18773 \begin_inset space ~
18784 \begin_layout Itemize
18785 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18786 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18787 should be followed by
18788 a line break opportunity.
18791 \begin_layout Standard
18792 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18793 \begin_inset space ~
18797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18799 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18810 \begin_layout Enumerate
18811 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18812 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18813 or en dashes (see section
18814 \begin_inset space ~
18818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18820 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18830 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18831 Changes and Backwards Compatibility
18834 \begin_layout Standard
18835 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18837 \begin_inset space ~
18840 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18841 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18850 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18851 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18859 \begin_layout Standard
18860 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18862 \begin_inset space ~
18865 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18867 prevents ligation to dashes.
18869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18876 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18881 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18882 after the input (unless the current text font is
18890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18891 The behavior was changed since
18892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18907 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18908 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18909 as non-breakable dashes.
18910 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18918 \begin_layout Standard
18921 \begin_inset space ~
18929 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18931 \begin_inset space ~
18934 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18937 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18938 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18939 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18940 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18942 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18946 If you used both literal and
18947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18954 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18956 \begin_inset space ~
18959 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18960 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18963 \begin_layout Subsection
18965 \begin_inset Index idx
18968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18975 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18977 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18984 \begin_layout Standard
18985 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18986 but automatically in the output.
18987 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18993 \begin_inset Index idx
18996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19003 following the rules of the document language.
19005 does not hyphenate text in the
19009 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
19012 \begin_layout Standard
19014 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
19018 font and with unusual constructs, like
19019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19027 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
19028 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
19029 This is done with the menu
19031 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19032 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19034 \begin_inset space ~
19040 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19042 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19046 \begin_layout Standard
19047 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
19048 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
19050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19059 would then see the hyphen
19060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19067 as a line break possibility.
19068 A line break at this point would look ugly.
19069 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
19072 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19073 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19076 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
19078 Prevent Hyphenation
19083 \begin_inset space ~
19091 \begin_layout Subsection
19093 \begin_inset Index idx
19096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19105 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19106 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
19107 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19109 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
19116 \begin_layout Standard
19117 When \SpecialChar LyX
19118 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19119 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19121 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
19124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19127 appropriate amount of space.
19128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19131 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
19133 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
19134 gets after another word.
19137 \begin_layout Standard
19138 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
19139 not work in all cases.
19141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19152 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
19153 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
19156 \begin_layout Standard
19157 Here are some examples of
19161 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
19164 \begin_layout Itemize
19169 \begin_layout Itemize
19174 \begin_layout Standard
19175 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
19178 \begin_layout Itemize
19180 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19184 this is too much space!
19187 \begin_layout Itemize
19192 \begin_layout Standard
19193 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
19196 \begin_layout Standard
19197 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
19200 \begin_layout Enumerate
19204 \begin_inset space ~
19209 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
19210 \begin_inset space ~
19214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19216 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
19221 \begin_inset Index idx
19224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19225 Spaces ! inter-word
19233 \begin_layout Enumerate
19237 \begin_inset space ~
19242 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
19243 \begin_inset space ~
19247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19249 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
19254 \begin_inset Index idx
19257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19266 \begin_layout Enumerate
19270 \begin_inset space ~
19274 \begin_inset space ~
19278 \begin_inset space ~
19285 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19287 \begin_inset space ~
19292 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
19293 This function is also bound to
19296 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
19302 \begin_layout Standard
19303 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
19306 \begin_layout Itemize
19308 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19312 \begin_inset space \space{}
19315 this is too much space!
19318 \begin_layout Itemize
19319 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
19323 \begin_layout Standard
19324 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
19325 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
19327 will take care of this.
19330 \begin_layout Standard
19331 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
19335 \begin_inset space ~
19341 feature described in the section
19343 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
19348 Additional Features
19353 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19355 \begin_inset Index idx
19358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19359 Typography ! Quotation marks
19365 \begin_inset Index idx
19368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19369 Quotation marks | see
19373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19399 \begin_layout Standard
19401 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
19402 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
19403 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
19405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19413 The keyboard character,
19417 , generates this automatically.
19420 \begin_layout Standard
19421 You can specify what character the
19425 key produces by using the submenu
19431 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19435 \begin_inset Index idx
19438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19439 Document ! Settings
19444 dialog and switching the
19448 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
19449 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
19451 \change_deleted -712698321 1606924196
19453 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924196
19457 \begin_inset space ~
19463 \begin_layout Labeling
19464 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19476 \begin_inset space ~
19480 \begin_inset space ~
19484 \begin_inset Quotes els
19488 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19502 \begin_inset Quotes els
19506 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19509 quotation marks (as common, e.
19510 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19516 \begin_layout Labeling
19517 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19520 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19524 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19528 \begin_inset space ~
19532 \begin_inset space ~
19536 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19540 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19546 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19550 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19554 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19558 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19561 quotation marks (as common, e.
19562 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19568 \begin_layout Labeling
19569 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19572 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19576 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19580 \begin_inset space ~
19584 \begin_inset space ~
19588 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19592 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19598 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19602 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19606 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19610 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19613 quotation marks (as common, e.
19614 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19620 \begin_layout Labeling
19621 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19624 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19628 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19632 \begin_inset space ~
19636 \begin_inset space ~
19640 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19644 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19650 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19654 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19658 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19662 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19665 quotation marks (as common, e.
19666 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19672 \begin_layout Labeling
19673 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19676 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19680 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19684 \begin_inset space ~
19688 \begin_inset space ~
19692 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19696 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19702 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19706 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19710 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19714 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19717 quotation marks (as common, e.
19718 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19721 g., in Switzerland)
19724 \begin_layout Labeling
19725 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19728 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19732 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19736 \begin_inset space ~
19740 \begin_inset space ~
19744 \begin_inset Quotes als
19748 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19754 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19758 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19762 \begin_inset Quotes als
19766 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19769 quotation marks (as common, e.
19770 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19776 \begin_layout Labeling
19777 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19780 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19784 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19788 \begin_inset space ~
19792 \begin_inset space ~
19796 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19800 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19806 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19810 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19814 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19818 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19821 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19824 \begin_layout Labeling
19825 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19828 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19832 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19836 \begin_inset space ~
19840 \begin_inset space ~
19844 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19848 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19854 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19858 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19862 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19866 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19869 quotation marks (as common, e.
19870 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19873 g., in Great Britain)
19876 \begin_layout Labeling
19877 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19880 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19884 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19888 \begin_inset space ~
19892 \begin_inset space ~
19896 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19900 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19906 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19910 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19914 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19918 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19921 quotation marks (as common, e.
19922 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19928 \begin_layout Labeling
19929 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19932 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19936 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19940 \begin_inset space ~
19944 \begin_inset space ~
19948 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19952 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19958 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19962 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19966 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19970 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19973 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19978 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19979 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19980 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19981 the inner marks differ).
19989 \begin_layout Labeling
19990 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19993 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19997 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20001 \begin_inset space ~
20005 \begin_inset space ~
20009 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20013 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20019 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20023 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20027 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20031 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20034 quotation marks (as common, e.
20035 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20041 \begin_layout Labeling
20042 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20045 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20049 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20053 \begin_inset space ~
20057 \begin_inset space ~
20061 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20065 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20071 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20075 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20079 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20083 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20086 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
20087 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924211
20091 \begin_layout Labeling
20092 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20094 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924279
20097 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20101 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20105 \begin_inset space ~
20109 \begin_inset space ~
20113 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20117 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20125 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20133 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20141 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20149 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20154 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
20159 \begin_layout Labeling
20160 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20161 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20169 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20175 \begin_inset space ~
20179 \begin_inset space ~
20185 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20193 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20197 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20201 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20205 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20209 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20212 quotation marks (as common, e.
20213 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20222 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338376
20223 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20225 name "fn:cjk-quotes"
20231 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20232 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20240 \begin_layout Labeling
20241 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20242 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20250 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20256 \begin_inset space ~
20260 \begin_inset space ~
20266 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20274 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20278 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20282 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20286 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20290 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20293 quotation marks (as common, e.
20294 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20297 g., in North Korea and China)
20298 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
20300 \begin_inset script superscript
20302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20304 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
20305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20307 reference "fn:cjk-quotes"
20322 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338417
20327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20328 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20329 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20339 \begin_layout Standard
20340 Inner quotation marks
20344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20345 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
20346 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
20347 case (and specifically the British style shows that
20348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20355 does not necessarily mean
20356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20364 This is why we call them
20365 \begin_inset Quotes els
20369 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20385 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
20387 \begin_inset Quotes els
20391 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20394 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
20397 arg "quote-insert inner"
20402 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20408 \begin_layout Standard
20409 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
20410 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
20411 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
20412 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
20413 If you check the setting
20415 Use dynamic quotation marks
20419 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20420 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20423 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
20424 they appear in a special color).
20425 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
20426 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
20428 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20431 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
20434 \begin_layout Standard
20435 Individual quotation marks (i.
20436 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20439 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
20440 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
20444 \begin_layout Subsection
20446 \begin_inset Index idx
20449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20450 Typography ! Ligatures
20456 \begin_inset Index idx
20459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20488 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20490 name "subsec:Ligatures"
20497 \begin_layout Standard
20498 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
20499 print them as single characters.
20500 These groups are known as
20505 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
20506 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
20508 Here are the standard ligatures:
20511 \begin_layout Itemize
20515 \begin_layout Itemize
20519 \begin_layout Itemize
20523 \begin_layout Itemize
20527 \begin_layout Itemize
20531 \begin_layout Standard
20532 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
20535 \begin_layout Standard
20536 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
20537 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
20538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20545 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
20546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20561 To break a ligature, use
20563 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20564 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20566 \begin_inset space ~
20573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20584 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20601 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20609 \begin_layout Subsection
20611 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
20613 \begin_inset Index idx
20616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20626 \begin_layout Standard
20629 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20630 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
20634 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
20637 \begin_layout Description
20639 The name of the game.
20642 \begin_layout Description
20644 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
20648 \begin_layout Description
20650 The \SpecialChar TeX
20651 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
20655 \begin_layout Description
20656 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
20657 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20661 \begin_layout Standard
20662 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20668 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
20672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20676 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
20677 world to give programs geek version numbers.
20678 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
20679 converges to the number
20680 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
20683 : The actual version is
20684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20692 , the previous one was
20693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20704 \begin_layout Subsection
20706 \begin_inset Index idx
20709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20718 \begin_layout Standard
20719 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
20720 space between two words.
20721 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
20724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20731 for units use the menu
20733 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20734 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20736 \begin_inset space ~
20744 arg "space-insert thin"
20750 \begin_layout Standard
20751 Here is an example to show the differences:
20754 \begin_layout Standard
20755 \begin_inset Tabular
20756 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20757 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20758 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20759 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20766 \begin_inset space ~
20770 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20782 space between number and unit
20789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20794 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20798 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20810 half space between number and unit
20823 \begin_layout Subsection
20825 \begin_inset Index idx
20828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20829 Typography ! Widows and orphans
20837 \begin_layout Standard
20838 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20840 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20841 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20842 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20843 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20844 These bits of text became known as
20855 \begin_layout Standard
20856 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20857 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20858 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20859 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20860 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20861 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20862 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20863 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20864 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20865 \begin_inset Newline newline
20873 \begin_inset Newline newline
20881 \begin_inset Newline newline
20884 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20885 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20886 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20888 \begin_inset space ~
20892 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20894 key "latexcompanion"
20900 \begin_inset space ~
20904 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20911 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20912 's page break mechanism.
20915 \begin_layout Chapter
20916 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20917 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20919 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20926 \begin_layout Standard
20927 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20930 \begin_inset space ~
20936 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20939 \begin_layout Section
20941 \begin_inset Index idx
20944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20951 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20960 \begin_layout Standard
20962 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20965 \begin_layout Description
20968 \begin_inset space ~
20971 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20972 \begin_inset Newline newline
20976 \begin_inset Note Note
20979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20980 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20988 \begin_layout Description
20989 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20990 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20991 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20994 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20995 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20997 \begin_inset space ~
21003 \begin_inset Newline newline
21007 \begin_inset Note Comment
21010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21011 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
21020 \begin_layout Description
21022 \begin_inset space ~
21025 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
21026 set in the document settings under
21028 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
21030 \begin_inset space ~
21036 \begin_inset Newline newline
21040 \begin_inset Newline newline
21044 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21053 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
21054 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
21059 of a comment that appears in the output.
21065 \begin_inset Newline newline
21069 \begin_inset Newline newline
21072 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
21075 \begin_layout Standard
21076 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
21084 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21088 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
21091 \begin_layout Section
21093 \begin_inset Index idx
21096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21103 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21105 name "sec:Footnotes"
21112 \begin_layout Standard
21114 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
21117 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21120 or the toolbar button
21123 arg "footnote-insert"
21135 \begin_inset Graphics
21136 filename clipart/footnote.png
21145 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21146 's representation of your footnote.
21156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21175 label, the box will
21179 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
21180 Clicking on the box label again will close
21193 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
21194 and click on the footnote
21209 \begin_layout Standard
21210 Here is an example footnote:
21218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21219 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
21227 \begin_layout Standard
21228 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
21229 position where the footnote box is placed.
21230 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
21231 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
21232 according to the document class.
21234 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
21235 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21241 ey are described in the
21244 \begin_inset space ~
21252 \begin_layout Section
21254 \begin_inset Index idx
21257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21264 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21266 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
21273 \begin_layout Standard
21274 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
21276 When you insert a margin note via the menu
21278 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21280 \begin_inset space ~
21285 or the toolbar button
21288 arg "marginalnote-insert"
21307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21314 appearing within your text.
21315 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21316 's representation of your margin
21325 \begin_layout Standard
21326 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
21330 \begin_inset Marginal
21333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21335 This is a marginal note.
21343 \begin_layout Standard
21344 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
21345 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
21346 pages, right on odd pages.
21349 \begin_layout Standard
21350 For further information about marginal notes see the section
21353 \begin_inset space ~
21361 \begin_inset space ~
21369 \begin_layout Section
21370 Graphics and Images
21371 \begin_inset Index idx
21374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21381 \begin_inset Index idx
21384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21391 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21393 name "sec:Graphics"
21400 \begin_layout Standard
21401 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
21402 you want and click on the toolbar icon
21405 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21410 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21414 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
21417 \begin_layout Standard
21418 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
21423 tab allows you to choose your image file.
21424 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
21426 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
21427 \begin_inset space ~
21431 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21433 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
21440 \begin_layout Standard
21445 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
21446 of the image in the output.
21447 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
21451 \begin_inset space ~
21455 \begin_inset space ~
21464 \begin_inset space ~
21468 \begin_inset space ~
21472 \begin_inset space ~
21477 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
21478 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
21486 \begin_layout Standard
21490 \begin_inset space ~
21494 \begin_inset space ~
21499 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
21500 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
21502 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
21507 \begin_inset space ~
21512 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
21513 with the image size is printed.
21516 \begin_layout Standard
21517 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
21518 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
21520 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
21523 \begin_layout Standard
21525 \begin_inset Graphics
21526 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
21534 \begin_layout Standard
21535 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
21536 the image into a float, see section
21537 \begin_inset space ~
21541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21543 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21550 \begin_layout Subsection
21552 \begin_inset Index idx
21555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21562 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21564 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
21571 \begin_layout Standard
21572 You can insert images in any known file format.
21573 But as we explained in section
21574 \begin_inset space ~
21578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21580 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21584 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
21586 therefore uses the program
21590 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
21591 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
21592 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
21593 \begin_inset space ~
21597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21599 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21606 \begin_layout Standard
21607 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
21610 \begin_layout Description
21612 \begin_inset space ~
21615 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
21616 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
21617 Well-known bitmap image formats are
21618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21621 Graphics Interchange Format
21622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21625 (GIF, file extension
21626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21638 \begin_inset Index idx
21641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21673 Portable Network Graphics
21674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21677 (PNG, file extension
21678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21690 \begin_inset Index idx
21693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21725 Joint Photographic Experts Group
21726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21729 (JPG, file extension
21730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21754 \begin_inset Index idx
21757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21788 \begin_layout Description
21790 \begin_inset space ~
21793 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21795 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21796 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21797 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21798 \begin_inset Newline newline
21801 Scalable image formats can be
21802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21805 Scalable Vector Graphics
21806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21809 (SVG, file extension
21810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21822 \begin_inset Index idx
21825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21857 Encapsulated PostScript
21858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21861 (EPS, file extension
21862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21874 \begin_inset Index idx
21877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21909 Portable Document Format
21910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21913 (PDF, file extension
21914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21926 \begin_inset Index idx
21929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21944 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21945 result will not be scalable.
21946 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21952 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21960 \begin_layout Standard
21961 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21968 \begin_layout Subsection
21969 Grouping of Image Settings
21970 \begin_inset Index idx
21973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21974 Images ! Settings grouping
21982 \begin_layout Standard
21983 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21985 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21986 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21988 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21989 need to manually change each of them.
21992 \begin_layout Standard
21993 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21996 \begin_inset space ~
22000 \begin_inset space ~
22012 \begin_inset space ~
22016 \begin_inset space ~
22022 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
22023 and checking the name of the desired group.
22026 \begin_layout Section
22028 \begin_inset Index idx
22031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22038 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22047 \begin_layout Standard
22048 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
22051 arg "tabular-insert"
22056 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22060 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
22061 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
22062 , and you can select a specific (border) style
22065 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
22066 from the rest of the table.
22067 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
22068 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
22070 Here is an example table:
22073 \begin_layout Standard
22075 \begin_inset Tabular
22076 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
22077 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22078 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22079 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22080 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22081 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22275 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
22279 \begin_layout Standard
22281 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
22282 This corresponds to the
22283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22290 table style listed in the style selection.
22293 \begin_layout Standard
22295 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
22296 Other available styles include:
22299 \begin_layout Itemize
22301 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
22303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22310 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
22314 \begin_layout Itemize
22316 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
22317 a border-less table with no lines at all,
22320 \begin_layout Itemize
22322 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
22324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22331 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
22332 bold top/bottom lines (see
22343 \begin_layout Standard
22345 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
22346 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
22347 button can be changed in
22349 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
22350 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
22354 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
22358 \begin_layout Subsection
22362 \begin_layout Standard
22363 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
22366 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
22370 This brings up the table dialog.
22371 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
22372 cursor is placed currently.
22373 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
22374 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
22375 done on all of your selection.
22378 \begin_layout Standard
22379 In addition to the table dialog, the
22382 \begin_inset space ~
22387 helps you in setting table properties.
22388 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
22391 \begin_layout Standard
22395 \begin_inset space ~
22400 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
22401 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
22402 current cell respectively.
22403 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
22405 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
22406 of text, see section
22407 \begin_inset space ~
22411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22413 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
22420 \begin_layout Standard
22421 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
22422 using the check box
22431 This will merge the cells to
22435 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
22436 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
22437 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
22438 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
22439 in the last row without the upper border:
22442 \begin_layout Standard
22444 \begin_inset Tabular
22445 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
22446 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
22447 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22448 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
22449 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22450 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22461 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22470 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22546 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22581 \begin_layout Standard
22582 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
22583 -arguments for the table.
22584 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
22585 explained in the chapter
22592 \begin_inset space ~
22598 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
22599 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
22600 but are visible in the output.
22603 \begin_layout Standard
22604 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
22607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22612 Most DVI-viewers are
22616 able to display rotations.
22624 \begin_layout Standard
22629 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
22634 adds lines for all cell borders.
22637 \begin_layout Subsection
22639 \begin_inset Index idx
22642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22643 Tables ! Multi-page
22649 \begin_inset Index idx
22652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22661 \begin_layout Standard
22662 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
22665 \begin_inset space ~
22669 \begin_inset space ~
22677 \begin_inset space ~
22682 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
22683 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
22686 \begin_layout Description
22691 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22692 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
22693 Except for the first page, if
22696 \begin_inset space ~
22704 \begin_layout Description
22708 \begin_inset space ~
22713 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22714 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
22717 \begin_layout Description
22722 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22723 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
22724 except for the last page, if
22727 \begin_inset space ~
22735 \begin_layout Description
22739 \begin_inset space ~
22744 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22745 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22748 \begin_layout Description
22749 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22750 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22752 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22756 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22759 \begin_inset space ~
22767 \begin_layout Standard
22768 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22769 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22770 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22776 In this context, first means first in this order:
22779 \begin_inset space ~
22791 \begin_inset space ~
22796 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
22799 \begin_layout Standard
22801 \begin_inset Tabular
22802 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22803 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22804 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22805 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22806 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22807 <row endfirsthead="true">
22808 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22814 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
22819 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22828 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22838 <row endfirsthead="true">
22839 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22850 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22859 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22871 <row endhead="true">
22872 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22883 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22892 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22902 <row endhead="true">
22903 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22914 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22923 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22935 <row endfoot="true">
22936 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22947 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22956 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22987 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23928 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23937 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23946 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23957 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23988 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24019 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24050 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24081 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24112 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24143 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24174 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24205 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24236 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24267 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24298 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24329 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24360 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24391 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24422 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24453 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24484 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24515 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24546 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24577 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24608 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24639 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24670 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24701 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24732 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24763 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24794 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24825 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24856 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24887 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24917 <row endlastfoot="true">
24918 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24929 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24938 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24955 \begin_layout Subsection
24957 \begin_inset Index idx
24960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24967 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24969 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24976 \begin_layout Standard
24977 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24978 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24979 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24980 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24984 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24987 \begin_layout Standard
24988 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24989 for the column in the table dialog.
24990 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24991 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24995 \begin_layout Standard
24997 \begin_inset Tabular
24998 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24999 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25000 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25001 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
25002 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25022 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25091 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
25096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25147 This is longer now.
25152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25203 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
25204 This is longer now.
25209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25235 \begin_layout Standard
25236 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
25237 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
25241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25242 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
25243 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
25248 Selection with the mouse or with
25252 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
25253 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
25254 the selection from outside the table.
25257 \begin_layout Section
25259 \begin_inset Index idx
25262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25269 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25278 \begin_layout Subsection
25282 \begin_layout Standard
25283 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
25284 have a fixed location.
25286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25293 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
25301 \begin_inset space ~
25306 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
25307 too many notes on the current page.
25310 \begin_layout Standard
25311 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
25312 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
25313 and pages without text.
25314 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
25315 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
25316 Floats are therefore numbered.
25317 Referencing is described in section
25318 \begin_inset space ~
25322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25324 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25331 \begin_layout Standard
25332 To insert a float, use the menu
25334 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25338 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
25339 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
25341 After the label you can insert the caption text.
25342 \begin_inset Index idx
25345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25351 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
25352 paragraph within the float.
25353 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
25354 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
25355 left-clicking on the box label.
25356 A closed float box looks like this:
25357 \begin_inset Graphics
25358 filename clipart/float.png
25363 – a gray button with a red label.
25366 \begin_layout Standard
25367 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
25369 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
25372 \begin_layout Subsection
25374 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25376 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
25381 \begin_inset Index idx
25384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25385 Floats ! Figure floats
25393 \begin_layout Standard
25395 \begin_inset space ~
25399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25401 reference "fig:A-star-in"
25405 was created using the menu
25407 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25408 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25414 arg "float-insert figure"
25418 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
25421 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25427 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
25431 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
25432 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
25434 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25436 \begin_inset space ~
25444 arg "layout-paragraph"
25450 \begin_layout Standard
25451 \begin_inset Float figure
25458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25460 \begin_inset Graphics
25461 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25471 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25476 name "fig:A-star-in"
25493 \begin_layout Standard
25494 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
25495 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
25497 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25506 ) and refer to it using the menu
25508 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25514 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25518 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
25519 vague references like
25520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25527 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
25528 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
25530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25538 For more about cross-references, see section
25539 \begin_inset space ~
25543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25545 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25552 \begin_layout Standard
25553 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
25554 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
25555 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
25556 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
25557 as described in section
25558 \begin_inset space ~
25562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25564 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
25570 \begin_inset space ~
25574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25576 reference "fig:Two-images"
25580 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
25581 You can also set the images one below the other.
25583 \begin_inset space ~
25587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25589 reference "fig:Undefinable"
25594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25596 reference "fig:Star"
25600 are the subfigures.
25603 \begin_layout Standard
25604 \begin_inset Float figure
25611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25612 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25616 \begin_inset Float figure
25623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25624 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25629 name "fig:Undefinable"
25641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25642 \begin_inset Graphics
25643 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
25655 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25659 \begin_inset Float figure
25666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25667 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25670 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25685 \begin_inset Graphics
25686 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25698 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25705 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25708 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25710 name "fig:Two-images"
25727 \begin_layout Subsection
25729 \begin_inset Index idx
25732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25733 Floats ! Table floats
25741 \begin_layout Standard
25742 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25744 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25745 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25748 or the toolbar button
25751 arg "float-insert table"
25755 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25756 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25757 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25759 \begin_inset space ~
25763 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25765 reference "tab:Table-float"
25772 \begin_layout Standard
25773 \begin_inset Float table
25780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25781 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25784 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25786 name "tab:Table-float"
25798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25800 \begin_inset Tabular
25801 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25802 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25803 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25804 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25805 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25932 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25953 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25956 \end{array}\right]$
25964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25977 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25998 \begin_layout Subsection
26000 \begin_inset Index idx
26003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26012 \begin_layout Standard
26014 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
26015 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
26016 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
26018 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
26026 \begin_inset space ~
26034 \begin_layout Section
26036 \begin_inset Index idx
26039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26048 \begin_layout Standard
26050 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
26052 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
26053 \begin_inset space \space{}
26059 \begin_layout Standard
26060 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
26061 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
26063 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26067 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
26068 and its alignment within the page.
26071 \begin_layout Standard
26073 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26083 height_special "totalheight"
26088 backgroundcolor "none"
26091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26094 This is a minipage.
26095 The text is set in an italic style.
26098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26101 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
26102 another formatting.
26110 \begin_layout Standard
26111 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
26114 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
26118 as described in section
26119 \begin_inset space ~
26123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26125 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
26130 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
26136 \begin_layout Standard
26137 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26147 height_special "totalheight"
26152 backgroundcolor "none"
26155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26156 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
26157 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
26163 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26167 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26177 height_special "totalheight"
26182 backgroundcolor "none"
26185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26186 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
26187 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
26195 \begin_layout Standard
26196 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26202 \begin_layout Standard
26203 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
26205 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
26212 \begin_inset space ~
26220 \begin_layout Chapter
26221 Mathematical Formulas
26222 \begin_inset Index idx
26225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26232 \begin_inset Index idx
26235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26264 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26266 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
26273 \begin_layout Standard
26274 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
26279 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
26282 \begin_layout Section
26284 \begin_inset Index idx
26287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26296 \begin_layout Standard
26297 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
26310 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
26312 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
26313 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
26314 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
26316 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26322 \begin_layout Standard
26323 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
26327 \begin_inset space ~
26332 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
26335 \begin_layout Standard
26336 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
26337 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
26340 \begin_layout Standard
26341 This is a line with an inline formula
26342 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
26348 \begin_layout Standard
26349 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
26350 paragraph, like this one:
26351 \begin_inset Formula
26358 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
26361 \begin_layout Standard
26363 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
26365 For example, typing
26366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26379 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
26380 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
26384 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
26387 \begin_inset space ~
26395 \begin_layout Subsection
26396 Navigating in Formulas
26397 \begin_inset Index idx
26400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26409 \begin_layout Standard
26410 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
26411 achieved with the arrow keys.
26413 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
26414 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
26419 will leave a formula construct (a square root
26420 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
26424 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
26428 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
26431 \end{array}\right]$
26439 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
26444 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
26445 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
26448 \begin_layout Standard
26453 , printed in this document as
26454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26458 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26465 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
26466 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
26467 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
26472 For example, if you want
26473 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
26481 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26491 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26495 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26500 , since in the latter case only the
26503 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
26508 will be under the square root sign:
26509 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
26515 \begin_layout Standard
26516 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
26518 \begin_inset Formula
26520 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
26529 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
26530 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
26533 \begin_layout Subsection
26537 \begin_layout Standard
26538 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
26539 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
26543 and a cursor movement key to select text.
26544 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
26545 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
26546 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
26547 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
26551 \begin_layout Subsection
26552 Exponents and Subscripts
26553 \begin_inset Index idx
26556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26563 \begin_inset Index idx
26566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26575 \begin_layout Standard
26576 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
26579 arg "math-superscript"
26585 arg "math-subscript"
26588 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
26590 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
26593 , type in a formula
26596 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26606 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
26612 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
26616 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
26622 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26628 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
26630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26637 , you have to use an extra
26641 to separate the circumflex and the character.
26642 For example, if you want
26643 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
26649 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26655 Subscripts are similar: To get
26656 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
26662 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26670 \begin_layout Subsection
26672 \begin_inset Index idx
26675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26684 \begin_layout Standard
26685 Create a fraction either with the command
26691 or by using the icon
26694 arg "math-insert \\frac"
26700 \begin_inset space ~
26706 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
26707 The cursor is above the fraction line.
26708 To move it to the bottom, simply press
26713 To move back up, press
26718 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
26719 \begin_inset Formula
26721 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26724 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26732 \begin_layout Subsection
26734 \begin_inset Index idx
26737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26746 \begin_layout Standard
26747 Roots can be created using the
26750 \begin_inset space ~
26758 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26764 arg "math-insert \\root"
26786 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
26792 always produces a square root.
26795 \begin_layout Subsection
26796 Operators with Limits
26797 \begin_inset Index idx
26800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26807 \begin_inset Index idx
26810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26819 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26826 \begin_layout Standard
26828 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26832 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26835 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26836 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26837 by entering them as you would enter a super-
26838 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
26839 The sum operator will automatically place its
26840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26847 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26849 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26853 \begin_inset Formula
26855 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26860 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26864 \begin_layout Standard
26865 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26867 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26868 behind the operator and using the menu
26870 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26871 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26873 \begin_inset space ~
26877 \begin_inset space ~
26891 \begin_layout Standard
26892 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26901 \begin_inset Index idx
26904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26911 \begin_inset Formula
26913 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26918 which will place the
26919 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26931 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26932 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26938 \begin_layout Standard
26939 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26946 Have a look at section
26947 \begin_inset space ~
26951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26953 reference "subsec:Functions"
26957 for an explanation of function macros.
26960 \begin_layout Subsection
26962 \begin_inset Index idx
26965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26974 \begin_layout Standard
26975 Most math symbols can be found in the
26978 \begin_inset space ~
26983 under one of several categories; including
27000 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
27004 \begin_layout Standard
27005 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27006 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
27007 don't have to use the
27010 \begin_inset space ~
27015 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
27017 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
27020 \begin_layout Subsection
27022 \begin_inset Index idx
27025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27034 \begin_layout Standard
27035 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
27041 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
27047 \begin_inset space ~
27055 arg "math-insert \\space"
27059 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
27060 For example, the sequence
27065 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
27068 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27070 \begin_inset Graphics
27071 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
27076 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
27077 the space marker and enter space again several times.
27078 With every space enter the size will be changed.
27079 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
27080 , because they are negative
27082 Here are two examples:
27085 \begin_layout Standard
27095 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
27101 \begin_layout Standard
27111 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
27117 \begin_layout Subsection
27119 \begin_inset Index idx
27122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27129 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27131 name "subsec:Functions"
27138 \begin_layout Standard
27142 \begin_inset space ~
27147 contains under the button
27150 arg "math-insert \\functions"
27153 a number of function macros, such as
27154 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
27158 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
27166 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
27173 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
27174 avoid confusions, because
27175 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
27179 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
27185 \begin_layout Standard
27186 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
27188 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
27192 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
27198 \begin_layout Standard
27199 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
27200 are placed, as described in section
27201 \begin_inset space ~
27205 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27207 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
27214 \begin_layout Subsection
27216 \begin_inset Index idx
27219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27228 \begin_layout Standard
27229 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
27231 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
27232 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
27233 commands, for example, to enter
27234 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27237 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
27238 Our example is entered by typing
27243 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27250 \begin_inset space ~
27254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27256 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
27260 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
27263 \begin_layout Standard
27264 \begin_inset Float table
27271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27272 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27275 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27277 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
27281 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
27289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27291 \begin_inset Tabular
27292 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
27293 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27294 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27295 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27296 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27380 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27434 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
27444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27488 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
27498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27542 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
27552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27596 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
27606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27650 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
27660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27704 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
27714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27758 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27812 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27857 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27878 \begin_layout Standard
27879 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27882 \begin_inset space ~
27890 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27893 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
27897 \begin_layout Section
27898 Brackets and Delimiters
27899 \begin_inset Index idx
27902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27909 \begin_inset Index idx
27912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27919 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27921 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27928 \begin_layout Standard
27929 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27931 For some purposes, using just the keys
27936 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27937 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27938 toolbar delimiter icon
27941 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27945 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27946 \begin_inset Formula
27948 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27956 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27957 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27961 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27964 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27970 \begin_inset Formula
27972 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27980 \begin_layout Standard
27981 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27982 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27986 \begin_layout Standard
27987 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27988 left side and right side.
27989 If you use the option
27992 \begin_inset space ~
27997 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27998 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
28000 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
28005 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
28006 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
28009 \begin_layout Standard
28010 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
28011 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
28012 is to go inside the brackets.
28013 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
28018 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
28019 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
28020 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
28024 arg "math-delim ( )"
28030 \begin_layout Section
28031 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
28032 \begin_inset Index idx
28035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28042 \begin_inset Index idx
28045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28052 \begin_inset Index idx
28055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28056 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28064 \begin_layout Standard
28065 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
28069 \begin_inset space ~
28077 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
28081 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
28082 Here is an example:
28083 \begin_inset Formula
28085 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
28094 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
28095 \begin_inset space ~
28099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28101 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
28106 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
28107 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
28108 This alignment is set in the box
28113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28162 for every column as default.
28163 For example, the sequence
28164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28175 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
28176 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
28177 corresponds to the relevant column.
28178 The result will look like this:
28179 \begin_inset Formula
28182 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
28183 column & has & has\,right\\
28184 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
28193 \begin_layout Standard
28194 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
28197 arg "newline-insert newline"
28200 while the cursor is in the matrix.
28201 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
28203 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28206 or the math toolbar.
28209 \begin_layout Standard
28210 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
28211 It can be created with the menu
28213 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28214 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28216 \begin_inset space ~
28228 Here is an example:
28229 \begin_inset Formula
28243 \begin_layout Standard
28244 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28247 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
28250 arg "newline-insert newline"
28254 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
28259 arg "newline-insert newline"
28262 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
28263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28270 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
28271 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
28272 A new row is created by every further entry of
28275 arg "newline-insert newline"
28279 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
28280 Here is an example:
28281 \begin_inset Formula
28283 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
28284 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
28289 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
28290 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
28291 \begin_inset Formula
28293 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
28301 \begin_layout Standard
28302 The multi-line formula type described here is called
28309 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
28310 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
28311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28313 reference "eq:asquared"
28318 The other types are described in section
28319 \begin_inset space ~
28323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28325 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28332 \begin_layout Section
28333 Formula Numbering and Referencing
28334 \begin_inset Index idx
28337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28338 Math ! Formula numbering
28344 \begin_inset Index idx
28347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28348 Math ! Referencing formulas
28354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28356 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
28363 \begin_layout Standard
28364 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
28366 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28367 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28369 \begin_inset space ~
28373 \begin_inset space ~
28381 arg "math-number-toggle"
28385 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28386 within parentheses.
28387 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
28388 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
28389 the document class.
28390 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
28391 separated by a dot:
28392 \begin_inset Formula
28402 arg "math-number-toggle"
28405 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
28406 You can only number displayed formulas.
28409 \begin_layout Standard
28410 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
28412 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28413 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28415 \begin_inset space ~
28419 \begin_inset space ~
28427 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
28430 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
28431 \begin_inset Formula
28434 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
28440 To number all lines use the shortcut
28443 arg "math-number-toggle"
28449 \begin_layout Standard
28450 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28453 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
28454 A label is inserted with the menu
28456 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28465 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
28466 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
28467 It is recommended that you use the suggested
28468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28479 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
28480 label type when you have many labels in your document.
28481 We inserted in the following example the label
28482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28489 in the second line:
28490 \begin_inset Formula
28492 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
28493 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
28498 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
28499 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
28500 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
28502 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28504 \begin_inset space ~
28512 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28516 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
28517 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28518 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
28519 as the formula number:
28522 \begin_layout Standard
28523 This is a cross-reference to equation (
28524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28526 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28533 \begin_layout Standard
28534 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
28535 's cross-reference box are described in section
28536 \begin_inset space ~
28540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28542 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28547 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
28555 \begin_layout Section
28556 User defined math macros
28557 \begin_inset Index idx
28560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28569 \begin_layout Standard
28571 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
28572 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
28573 Math macros are explained in section
28576 \begin_inset space ~
28588 \begin_layout Section
28592 \begin_layout Subsection
28594 \begin_inset Index idx
28597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28606 \begin_layout Standard
28607 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
28608 To set a font in a formula, use the
28611 \begin_inset space ~
28619 arg "math-insert \\font"
28622 , or enter its command, listed in table
28623 \begin_inset space ~
28627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28629 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28636 \begin_layout Standard
28637 \begin_inset Float table
28644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28645 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28648 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28650 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28654 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
28662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28664 \begin_inset Tabular
28665 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
28666 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28667 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28668 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28700 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
28708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28727 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28754 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28787 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
28795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28814 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
28822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28836 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
28837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28842 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28843 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
28851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28856 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28872 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28906 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28928 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
28929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28934 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28942 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
28950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28955 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28971 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29005 \begin_layout Standard
29006 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29014 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
29017 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
29019 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
29023 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
29042 \begin_layout Standard
29043 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
29044 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
29049 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
29050 space when you need a space in the box.
29051 Here is an example where
29052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29063 denotes the set of numbers:
29064 \begin_inset Formula
29066 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
29074 \begin_layout Standard
29075 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
29076 You can, for example, put a character in
29085 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
29089 \begin_inset Newline newline
29092 So it is better not to use this feature.
29095 \begin_layout Standard
29096 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
29097 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
29101 \begin_inset Newline newline
29104 You can only print them emboldened using the command
29110 , which works like the other typeface commands:
29111 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
29117 \begin_layout Standard
29124 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
29127 \begin_layout Standard
29128 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
29130 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29131 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29133 \begin_inset space ~
29141 \begin_layout Subsection
29143 \begin_inset Index idx
29146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29155 \begin_layout Standard
29156 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
29158 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
29162 \begin_inset space ~
29166 \begin_inset space ~
29174 \begin_inset space ~
29182 arg "math-insert \\font"
29186 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29187 in black instead of blue.
29188 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
29189 Here is an example:
29190 \begin_inset Formula
29193 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
29194 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
29203 \begin_layout Subsection
29205 \begin_inset Index idx
29208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29217 \begin_layout Standard
29218 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
29219 automatically chosen in most situations.
29237 For most characters,
29245 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
29246 and certain other structures, are set larger in
29251 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
29252 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
29253 thinks are appropriate.
29254 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
29257 arg "math-insert \\style"
29261 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
29262 For example, you can set
29263 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
29266 , which is normally in
29275 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
29279 The four styles are used in the following example:
29282 \begin_layout Standard
29283 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
29287 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
29291 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
29295 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
29301 \begin_layout Standard
29302 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
29303 is set in a particular size with the menu
29305 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29307 \begin_inset space ~
29312 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
29313 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
29314 will be adjusted to correspond.
29315 As an example here is a formula in the font size
29316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29326 \begin_layout Standard
29330 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
29336 \begin_layout Section
29337 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29339 \begin_inset Index idx
29342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29349 \begin_inset Index idx
29352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29361 \begin_layout Standard
29363 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
29364 that are in common use.
29367 \begin_layout Subsection
29368 Enabling AMS-Support
29371 \begin_layout Standard
29372 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
29374 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338725
29390 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338685
29391 selecting the checkbox
29394 \begin_inset space ~
29398 \begin_inset space ~
29402 \begin_inset space ~
29411 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29415 \begin_inset Index idx
29418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29419 Document ! Settings
29427 \begin_inset space ~
29433 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29434 -errors in formulas,
29435 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
29438 \begin_layout Subsection
29440 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29442 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
29447 \begin_inset Index idx
29450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29451 Math ! Multi-line Equations
29459 \begin_layout Standard
29460 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29461 provides a selection of different formula types.
29463 allows you to choose between
29484 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
29485 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29492 , for an explanation of these formula types.
29495 \begin_layout Chapter
29499 \begin_layout Section
29501 \begin_inset Index idx
29504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29511 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29513 name "sec:Cross-References"
29520 \begin_layout Standard
29521 One of \SpecialChar LyX
29522 's strengths is cross-references.
29523 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
29525 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
29526 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
29527 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
29530 \begin_layout Enumerate
29534 \begin_layout Enumerate
29535 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29537 name "enu:Second-item"
29544 \begin_layout Enumerate
29548 \begin_layout Standard
29549 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
29551 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29554 or by pressing the toolbar button
29561 A gray label box like this:
29562 \begin_inset Graphics
29563 filename clipart/label.png
29567 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
29569 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
29571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29604 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
29605 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
29607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29621 \begin_layout Standard
29622 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
29624 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29627 or the toolbar button
29630 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29634 A gray cross-reference box like this:
29635 \begin_inset Graphics
29636 filename clipart/reference.png
29640 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
29642 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
29643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29655 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
29659 \begin_layout Standard
29660 As an alternative to
29662 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29665 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
29670 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
29671 to the actual cursor position via the menu
29673 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29685 \begin_layout Standard
29686 Here is our cross-reference: Item
29687 \begin_inset space ~
29691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29693 reference "enu:Second-item"
29700 \begin_layout Standard
29701 It is recommended to use a protected space
29705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29706 described in section
29707 \begin_inset space ~
29711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29713 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
29722 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
29723 line breaks between them.
29726 \begin_layout Standard
29727 There are eight formats of cross-references:
29730 \begin_layout Description
29731 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
29732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29734 reference "fig:Two-images"
29741 \begin_layout Description
29742 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
29743 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
29745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29755 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29762 \begin_layout Description
29763 <page>: prints the page number: Page
29764 \begin_inset space ~
29768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29769 LatexCommand pageref
29770 reference "fig:Two-images"
29777 \begin_layout Description
29779 \begin_inset space ~
29783 \begin_inset space ~
29786 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
29787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29788 LatexCommand vpageref
29789 reference "fig:Two-images"
29794 \begin_inset Newline newline
29797 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
29798 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
29799 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
29800 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
29801 it prints “on the next page”.
29802 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
29805 \begin_layout Description
29807 \begin_inset space ~
29811 \begin_inset space ~
29815 \begin_inset space ~
29818 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
29819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29821 reference "fig:Two-images"
29826 \begin_inset Newline newline
29829 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
29835 ; otherwise it behaves like
29839 \begin_inset space ~
29843 \begin_inset space ~
29852 \begin_layout Description
29854 \begin_inset space ~
29857 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
29858 \begin_inset Newline newline
29862 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29870 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29880 \begin_inset Index idx
29883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29885 packages ! prettyref
29891 \begin_inset Index idx
29894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29896 packages ! refstyle
29907 \begin_inset Newline newline
29910 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
29911 -package should be used for this feature by setting
29914 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
29918 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29919 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29927 is the default and preferred because
29931 supports only English documents.
29932 The format is specified by using the command
29936 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
29945 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29946 preamble of the document.
29947 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
29949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29965 \begin_inset Newline newline
29972 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
29977 \begin_inset Newline newline
29988 predefines reference formats for all available types.
29989 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
29991 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
29992 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
29997 , you might do so as follows:
29998 \begin_inset Newline newline
30005 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
30006 format{prop}{Proposition
30011 \begin_inset Newline newline
30014 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
30015 the package documentation
30016 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30018 key "prettyref,refstyle"
30024 \begin_inset Newline newline
30035 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
30042 \begin_layout Description
30044 \begin_inset space ~
30047 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
30048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30049 LatexCommand nameref
30050 reference "fig:Two-images"
30057 \begin_layout Description
30059 \begin_inset space ~
30062 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30063 label for the reference:
30064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30065 LatexCommand labelonly
30066 reference "fig:Two-images"
30071 \begin_inset Newline newline
30074 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
30075 Code, if you want to issue a command
30076 that \SpecialChar LyX
30082 , then you may want to use the
30085 \begin_inset space ~
30090 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
30092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30100 This is the form needed for e.
30101 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30105 \begin_inset space \space{}
30112 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
30113 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
30115 The varieties are adjusted in the field
30119 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
30123 \begin_layout Standard
30124 You can only use the style
30128 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
30132 is always possible.
30135 \begin_layout Standard
30136 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
30137 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
30139 Referencing formulas is explained in section
30140 \begin_inset space ~
30144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30146 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
30153 \begin_layout Standard
30154 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
30158 \begin_inset space ~
30162 \begin_inset space ~
30167 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
30168 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
30169 (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding
30172 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
30175 \begin_inset space ~
30180 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
30181 You can also go back with the toolbar button
30184 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
30188 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757706
30189 or, using the menu: Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
30190 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
30196 \begin_layout Standard
30197 You can change labels at any time.
30198 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
30200 \change_deleted -584632292 1599757720
30202 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757724
30203 change them all manually
30208 \begin_layout Standard
30209 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
30211 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
30215 \begin_layout Standard
30216 References are described in detail in the section
30227 \begin_layout Section
30228 Table of Contents and other Listings
30229 \begin_inset Index idx
30232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30239 \begin_inset Index idx
30242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30243 Navigating ! Outline
30249 \begin_inset Index idx
30252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30259 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30268 \begin_layout Subsection
30270 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30272 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
30279 \begin_layout Standard
30280 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
30282 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30283 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30285 \begin_inset space ~
30289 \begin_inset space ~
30295 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
30297 If you click on it, the
30301 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
30302 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
30303 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
30305 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
30307 \begin_inset space ~
30312 that is described in section
30313 \begin_inset space ~
30317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30319 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
30326 \begin_layout Standard
30327 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
30328 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
30330 \begin_inset space ~
30334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30336 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
30340 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
30342 \begin_inset space ~
30346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30348 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
30352 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
30354 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
30357 \begin_layout Subsection
30358 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
30359 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30361 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
30368 \begin_layout Standard
30369 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
30371 You can insert them via the
30373 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30374 List/Contents/References
30377 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
30380 \begin_layout Section
30381 URLs and Hyperlinks
30382 \begin_inset Index idx
30385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30392 \begin_inset Index idx
30395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30404 \begin_layout Subsection
30406 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30415 \begin_layout Standard
30416 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
30418 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30424 \begin_layout Standard
30425 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
30427 \begin_inset Flex URL
30430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30432 https://www.lyx.org
30440 \begin_layout Standard
30441 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
30447 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
30451 \begin_layout Standard
30452 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30460 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
30469 \begin_layout Subsection
30471 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30473 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
30480 \begin_layout Standard
30481 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
30483 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30486 or with the toolbar button
30493 The appearing dialog has two fields:
30502 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
30503 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
30504 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30506 name "LyX's homepage"
30507 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30512 , an Email address like this:
30513 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30515 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
30516 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
30522 , or a link to a file.
30527 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30535 \begin_layout Standard
30536 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
30538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30549 to the link target.
30552 \begin_layout Standard
30553 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
30554 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
30555 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
30556 the text style dialog.
30557 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
30561 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30563 name "LyX's homepage"
30564 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30572 \begin_layout Standard
30573 The link text color can be changed, when the option
30577 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
30579 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30580 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30584 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
30586 \begin_inset Newline newline
30594 \begin_inset Newline newline
30601 in the PDF Properties dialog.
30602 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
30606 \begin_layout Section
30608 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
30610 \begin_inset Index idx
30613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30620 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30622 name "sec:Counters"
30629 \begin_layout Standard
30631 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
30632 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30633 is its ability to manage counters.
30634 Mostly, this is handled automatically, but there are times one wants to
30635 modify counters directly.
30636 This can be done in LyX using the counter inset, which is accessible from
30638 This allows one to set a counter's value; to reset it (to zero);
30642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30644 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541231
30645 Note that the section counter, e.g., starts with its value at zero and then
30646 is incremented to one when the first section is created.
30647 So, if you want the next section to be section five, say, then you need
30648 to set the section counter to four.
30655 to add to the value (or subtract from it, since the value added can be
30656 negative); to save it; to restore the saved value; and to print the value.
30657 These effects can also be limited to LyX itself.
30658 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output, as well as in LaTeX.
30661 \begin_layout Standard
30663 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
30664 There are five commands you can use:
30667 \begin_layout Enumerate
30669 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
30670 Set counter: Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
30673 \begin_layout Enumerate
30675 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
30676 Increase counter: Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or
30677 to subtract, if you choose a negative number)
30680 \begin_layout Enumerate
30682 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
30683 Reset to zero: Sets the value of the counter to 0.
30686 \begin_layout Enumerate
30688 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
30689 Save value of counter: Saves the value of the counter so that it can later
30693 \begin_layout Enumerate
30695 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
30696 Restore value of counter: Restores the previously saved value.
30699 \begin_layout Standard
30701 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
30702 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all
30703 those that are available in the current document class.
30708 \begin_layout Section
30710 \begin_inset Index idx
30713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30720 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30722 name "sec:Appendices"
30729 \begin_layout Standard
30730 Appendices are created with the menu
30732 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30734 \begin_inset space ~
30738 \begin_inset space ~
30744 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
30745 as the appendix part of the book.
30746 This part is marked with a red borderline.
30749 \begin_layout Standard
30750 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
30751 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
30752 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
30753 and the subsection number.
30754 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
30758 \begin_layout Standard
30760 \begin_inset space ~
30764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30766 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
30774 \begin_inset space ~
30778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30780 reference "subsec:Export"
30787 \begin_layout Section
30789 \begin_inset Index idx
30792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30799 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30801 name "sec:Bibliography"
30808 \begin_layout Standard
30809 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
30811 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
30812 \begin_inset space ~
30816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30818 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30825 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
30830 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
30831 \begin_inset space ~
30835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30837 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
30842 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
30843 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
30844 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
30848 using a bibliography database.
30851 \begin_layout Standard
30852 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
30853 use two bibliographies in this document, a
30857 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
30858 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
30859 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
30860 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
30861 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
30864 \begin_layout Subsection
30865 The Bibliography Environment
30866 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30868 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30875 \begin_layout Standard
30880 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
30882 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
30891 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
30893 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
30894 of ASCII characters only.
30898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30900 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30903 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
30909 \begin_inset Newline newline
30913 \begin_inset Flex URL
30916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30918 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
30928 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30938 , a short form of its title, as the key.
30939 \begin_inset Newline newline
30946 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
30947 the number of the entry.
30952 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30961 \begin_layout Standard
30962 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
30964 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30967 or the toolbar button
30970 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
30974 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
30975 containing the available citations.
30976 Select one or more keys from the list and
30986 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
30987 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
30991 \begin_layout Standard
30992 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
30993 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
30994 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
30996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31006 \begin_layout Standard
31010 Companion Second Edition
31013 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31015 key "latexcompanion"
31023 \begin_layout Standard
31024 The \SpecialChar LyX
31025 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
31026 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31036 \begin_layout Standard
31037 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31044 \begin_inset Index idx
31047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31056 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
31057 the label needs to be given the form
31058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31069 Author A and Author B(Year)
31070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31077 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
31084 \begin_inset space ~
31089 in the document settings
31090 \begin_inset Index idx
31093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31094 Document ! Settings
31101 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
31103 \begin_inset space ~
31109 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31111 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
31119 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
31121 Once you have done that, the
31125 dialog has three input fields instead of the
31142 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
31143 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
31144 These two are madatory.
31145 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
31148 Baker, Jones, and Williams
31150 ) and in abrreviated form (
31157 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
31158 add the abbreviated form to
31162 and the full list to the optional
31170 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
31171 If specified like this,
31173 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
31174 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
31177 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31184 is specified, toggling
31185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31192 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
31193 full and abbreviated list
31197 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
31198 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
31199 the citation references.
31200 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
31205 \begin_layout Standard
31206 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
31209 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31211 \begin_inset space ~
31219 arg "layout-paragraph"
31223 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
31226 \begin_layout Subsection
31227 Bibliography databases
31228 \begin_inset Index idx
31231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31232 Bibliography ! Databases
31238 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31240 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31247 \begin_layout Standard
31248 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
31253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31254 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
31256 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
31257 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
31262 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
31264 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
31265 your working field in a database.
31266 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
31267 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
31268 list for that document.
31269 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
31273 \begin_layout Standard
31274 The database is a text file with the file extension
31275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31286 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
31287 The format is explained in
31288 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31295 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31297 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31299 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
31305 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
31306 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
31307 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
31309 \begin_inset Flex URL
31312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31314 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
31322 \begin_layout Standard
31324 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
31325 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31326 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
31328 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
31330 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
31331 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
31332 Those are addressed by
31337 \begin_inset Index idx
31340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31342 packages ! biblatex
31348 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31349 (although it has been significantly
31350 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31360 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31361 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31362 might conversely fail to correctly
31363 handle databases that use specific
31372 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
31376 \begin_layout Standard
31377 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31382 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
31384 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31388 \begin_inset Index idx
31391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31392 Document ! Settings
31404 \begin_inset space ~
31409 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31417 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31418 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31420 \begin_inset Index idx
31423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31424 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31433 \begin_layout Standard
31434 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31437 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31438 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31440 \begin_inset space ~
31446 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
31447 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31455 Add bibliography to TOC
31457 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
31462 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
31463 in the document or just the cited references.
31465 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
31470 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
31471 differ from the encoding of the document.
31476 \begin_layout Standard
31477 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31478 style file is a text file with the file extension
31479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31490 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
31491 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31492 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
31493 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
31495 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
31500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31501 For information on how this is done, have a look at
31502 \begin_inset Newline newline
31506 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31508 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
31518 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31523 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
31527 \begin_layout Standard
31528 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
31531 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31533 \begin_inset Index idx
31536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31537 Bibliography ! Biblatex
31543 \begin_inset Index idx
31546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31548 packages ! biblatex
31556 \begin_layout Standard
31557 Accessing a database via
31561 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31564 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31565 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31567 \begin_inset space ~
31573 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31574 you cannot select a
31579 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
31583 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31586 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
31587 As for the styles, note the following.
31592 \begin_layout Standard
31597 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
31599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31610 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
31611 file (text file with the file extension
31612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31623 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
31624 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
31626 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
31630 \begin_layout Standard
31635 styles are not set in the
31638 \begin_inset space ~
31643 dialog, but in the document settings.
31644 \begin_inset Index idx
31647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31648 Document ! Settings
31653 However, in the dialog in the
31657 field, which is only visible if you use
31661 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
31662 example how its heading will appear).
31663 These options are described in detail in the
31668 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31678 \begin_layout Standard
31679 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
31680 \begin_inset space ~
31684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31686 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31696 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31697 Bibliography Processors
31700 \begin_layout Standard
31701 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
31702 uses a bibliography processor,
31703 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
31704 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
31705 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31707 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
31708 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
31711 \begin_layout Standard
31712 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
31714 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
31715 You can do this on a general level in
31717 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31718 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31719 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31722 or for individual documents in
31724 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31725 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31729 The following variants are available by default:
31732 \begin_layout Description
31733 biber a specific, modern processor
31734 \begin_inset Index idx
31737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31744 developed exclusively for
31748 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31754 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
31759 makes use of; if you use the
31763 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
31770 \begin_layout Description
31771 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
31772 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
31773 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
31777 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
31780 \begin_layout Description
31781 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
31782 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
31786 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
31790 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
31794 features are supported.
31797 \begin_layout Standard
31798 By default (with the
31804 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31805 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31818 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31819 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31820 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31823 ), \SpecialChar LyX
31824 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
31837 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31838 -based bibliography styles).
31839 This should suit most needs.
31842 \begin_layout Standard
31843 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
31844 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
31845 (in \SpecialChar LyX
31850 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31851 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
31852 You can adjust it in
31854 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31855 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31856 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31862 \begin_layout Standard
31863 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
31864 can add below the selection.
31865 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
31866 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31872 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31882 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31886 \begin_layout Standard
31888 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
31890 These are explained in detail in section
31892 Customizing Bibliographies
31896 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31901 Additional Features
31904 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273348
31908 \begin_layout Subsection
31910 \begin_inset Index idx
31913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31914 Bibliography ! Citation format
31920 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31922 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
31929 \begin_layout Standard
31930 Many different citation formats are common, e.
31931 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31935 \begin_inset space \space{}
31938 numerical citation (as
31939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31946 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
31947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31954 ) or author-year citations (as
31955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31964 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
31968 \begin_layout Standard
31969 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
31972 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31973 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31977 \begin_inset Index idx
31980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31981 Document ! Settings
31986 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
31992 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
31993 labels, is there to use
31996 \begin_inset space ~
32007 \begin_inset space ~
32012 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
32013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32015 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
32022 \begin_layout Standard
32023 With a bibliography database (see
32024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32026 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
32033 ) one has in contrary to the
32037 environment full access to the formatting styles.
32038 These style formats are available:
32041 \begin_layout Description
32043 \begin_inset space ~
32046 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32047 -based approached without any additional packages
32048 (simple numeric citations).
32051 \begin_layout Description
32052 Biblatex loads the package
32057 \begin_inset Index idx
32060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32062 packages ! biblatex
32067 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
32069 Biblatex citation style
32073 Biblatex bibliography style
32076 Options to the package
32080 can be entered in the
32087 \begin_layout Description
32089 \begin_inset space ~
32093 \begin_inset space ~
32096 mode) loads the package
32100 with the natbib compatibility mode.
32101 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
32113 behavior very closely.
32118 this option has some additional styles.
32123 styles are also supported by this variant.
32126 \begin_layout Description
32128 \begin_inset space ~
32131 (BibTeX) loads the package
32136 \begin_inset Index idx
32139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32146 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
32149 \begin_layout Description
32151 \begin_inset space ~
32154 (BibTeX) loads the package
32159 \begin_inset Index idx
32162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32169 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
32172 \begin_layout Standard
32181 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
32183 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
32192 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
32194 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
32195 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
32197 Biblatex citation style
32200 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
32206 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
32210 \begin_layout Standard
32211 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
32212 are available in the
32217 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
32218 a name prefix such as
32219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32234 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
32235 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32239 \begin_inset space \space{}
32243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32254 \begin_layout Standard
32255 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
32257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32261 \begin_inset space \space{}
32264 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
32266 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32270 \begin_inset space \space{}
32274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32286 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
32290 \begin_inset space ~
32298 \begin_inset space ~
32304 Here is a simple example where the text
32305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32309 \begin_inset space ~
32313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32316 appears after the reference:
32319 \begin_layout Quote
32321 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32324 key "latexcompanion"
32332 \begin_layout Standard
32333 All styles except for
32337 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
32339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32347 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
32351 \begin_layout Standard
32352 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
32353 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
32354 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
32359 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
32360 multi-citation (so-called
32361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32364 qualified citation lists
32365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32371 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
32376 dialog will display three columns in the field
32383 \begin_inset space ~
32391 \begin_inset space ~
32399 \begin_inset space ~
32405 If you double-click on an item's
32408 \begin_inset space ~
32416 \begin_inset space ~
32421 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
32424 General text before
32430 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
32433 \begin_layout Subsection
32435 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509964
32436 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32438 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
32442 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
32446 \begin_layout Standard
32448 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509000
32450 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
32453 \begin_inset space ~
32457 \begin_inset space ~
32461 \begin_inset space ~
32465 \begin_inset space ~
32468 Content\SpecialChar ldots
32471 context menu if specific conditions are met:
32474 \begin_layout Itemize
32476 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526971
32477 If citation entries include any of the fields
32478 \begin_inset Flex Code
32481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32483 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32492 \begin_inset Flex Code
32495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32497 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32505 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
32506 \begin_inset Flex Code
32509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32511 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32519 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv, JSTOR, PubMed, HDL, Google Books
32520 \begin_inset Flex Code
32523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32525 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32533 ), the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
32536 \begin_layout Itemize
32538 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
32539 If citation entries include any of the fields
32540 \begin_inset Flex Code
32543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32545 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32553 (filled by JabRef) or
32554 \begin_inset Flex Code
32557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32559 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32567 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local
32568 drive, the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
32569 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
32572 \begin_layout Standard
32574 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
32575 In addition to that, \SpecialChar LyX
32576 also searches your disk for matching files if you
32579 Search drive for cited files
32583 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32584 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
32585 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32586 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32590 It uses the tokens supplied at
32594 in the same preferences section (by default: year and authors).
32595 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the title of the file (at
32596 arbitrary position).
32598 opens the first matching file it finds.
32599 This might or might not be the file you are looking for; the more systematic
32600 your file naming is, and the less ambiguous keywords you use, the greater
32601 the chance this works for you.
32606 \begin_layout Standard
32608 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
32609 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
32610 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32612 \begin_inset Flex Code
32615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32617 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
32626 \begin_inset Flex Code
32629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32631 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509565
32639 , but there are also special keys, which are documented in the Customization
32643 Cite format description
32650 \begin_layout Section
32652 \begin_inset Index idx
32655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32662 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32671 \begin_layout Standard
32672 An index entry is created if you use the menu
32674 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32676 \begin_inset space ~
32681 or the toolbar button
32688 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
32689 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
32690 by \SpecialChar LyX
32691 as the index entry.
32694 \begin_layout Standard
32695 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
32697 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32698 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
32700 \begin_inset space ~
32706 A light blue box labeled
32707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32718 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
32719 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
32723 \begin_layout Standard
32724 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
32725 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32726 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
32727 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32729 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32731 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
32739 \begin_layout Subsection
32740 Grouping Index Entries
32741 \begin_inset Index idx
32744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32753 \begin_layout Standard
32754 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
32756 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
32757 lists under the entry
32758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32766 First we create the entry
32767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32775 \begin_inset space ~
32779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32781 reference "subsec:Lists"
32786 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
32787 \begin_inset space ~
32791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32793 reference "sec:Itemize"
32797 , we insert the command
32800 \begin_layout Standard
32806 \begin_layout Standard
32810 \begin_layout Standard
32816 \begin_layout Standard
32817 for the enumerated list in section
32818 \begin_inset space ~
32822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32824 reference "sec:Enumerate"
32831 \begin_layout Standard
32832 The exclamation mark
32833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32840 marks the grouping levels.
32841 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
32842 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
32843 If we don't have an index entry for
32844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32851 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
32854 \begin_layout Subsection
32856 \begin_inset Index idx
32859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32860 Index ! Page ranges
32868 \begin_layout Standard
32869 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
32871 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
32872 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
32873 an index entry in section
32874 \begin_inset space ~
32878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32880 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
32887 \begin_layout Standard
32890 Paragraph environments|(
32893 \begin_layout Standard
32894 and another entry at the end of section
32895 \begin_inset space ~
32899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32901 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
32908 \begin_layout Standard
32911 Paragraph environments|)
32914 \begin_layout Standard
32916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32939 respectively start and end the index range.
32940 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
32941 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
32942 the pages of the indexed document parts.
32943 An example is the index entry
32944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32947 Document ! Settings
32948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32954 \begin_layout Subsection
32956 \begin_inset Index idx
32959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32960 Index ! Cross referencing
32968 \begin_layout Standard
32969 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
32970 We referred for example in the index entry
32971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32979 \begin_inset space ~
32983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32985 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
32989 ) to the index entry
32990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32997 in the same section using the entry
33000 \begin_layout Standard
33003 GIF|see{Image formats}
33006 \begin_layout Standard
33007 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33009 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
33010 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
33013 \begin_layout Subsection
33015 \begin_inset Index idx
33018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33019 Index ! Entry order
33027 \begin_layout Standard
33028 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
33029 follow the rules for the index order.
33030 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
33035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33036 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
33038 \begin_inset space ~
33042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33044 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
33053 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
33054 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
33055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33079 \begin_inset Index idx
33082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33083 Dummy entries ! maïs
33089 \begin_inset Index idx
33092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33093 Dummy entries ! maître
33099 \begin_inset Index idx
33102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33103 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
33108 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
33109 maïs, maison, maître.
33110 To achieve this, we use the command
33113 \begin_layout Standard
33116 previous entry@current entry
33119 \begin_layout Standard
33120 In our case we want to have
33121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33136 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
33139 \begin_layout Standard
33145 \begin_layout Standard
33146 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
33147 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
33149 See the next subsection for an example.
33152 \begin_layout Subsection
33154 \begin_inset Index idx
33157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33158 Index ! Entry layout
33166 \begin_layout Standard
33167 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
33168 \begin_inset Index idx
33171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33174 This is an italic dummy entry
33179 You can also format the page number using the character
33180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33187 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33188 -command without a backslash.
33189 We can write for example
33192 \begin_layout Standard
33195 italic page number:|textit
33198 \begin_layout Standard
33199 to get the page number in italic.
33200 \begin_inset Index idx
33203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33204 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
33209 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
33210 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
33212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33228 \begin_inset space ~
33234 Have a look at section
33235 \begin_inset space ~
33239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33241 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33245 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33249 \begin_layout Standard
33250 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33258 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
33262 to generate the index, see section
33263 \begin_inset space ~
33267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33269 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
33278 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
33283 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
33284 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33287 key "latexcompanion"
33300 \begin_layout Standard
33301 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
33303 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
33304 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
33305 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
33306 If so, put the following in the preamble
33309 \begin_layout Standard
33321 \begin_layout Standard
33325 \begin_layout Standard
33331 \begin_layout Standard
33332 in the index entry.
33333 \begin_inset Index idx
33336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33337 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
33342 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
33343 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
33344 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
33347 \begin_layout Standard
33348 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
33349 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
33350 a bold font for all index entries.
33351 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
33363 documentation for details,
33364 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33366 key "makeindex,xindy"
33374 \begin_layout Subsection
33376 \begin_inset Index idx
33379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33386 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33388 name "subsec:Index-Program"
33395 \begin_layout Standard
33396 If the index generation program
33400 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
33401 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
33405 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33406 distribution, is used.
33410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33415 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
33416 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
33417 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
33418 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
33419 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
33429 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
33431 dialog, see section
33432 \begin_inset space ~
33436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33438 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33443 The available options are listed and explained in
33444 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33446 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
33452 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
33456 \begin_layout Standard
33457 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
33458 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
33461 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33462 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33466 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
33467 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
33470 \begin_layout Subsection
33474 \begin_layout Standard
33475 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
33476 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
33477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33484 next to the standard index.
33486 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
33487 that add this feature.
33494 \begin_inset Index idx
33497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33499 packages ! splitidx
33504 package to generate multiple indexes.
33505 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
33510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33511 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
33513 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33521 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33522 style, but it also includes
33523 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
33524 Please consult the package's manual for details.
33532 \begin_layout Standard
33533 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
33534 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
33536 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33537 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33540 and select the option
33542 Use multiple Indexes
33549 already contains the standard index
33550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33558 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
33559 also appear as a heading) to the
33563 input field and press the
33568 The new index now also appears in the list.
33569 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
33570 label color to the new index.
33573 \begin_layout Standard
33574 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
33577 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33578 List/Contents/References
33584 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
33585 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
33586 are additional features:
33589 \begin_layout Itemize
33590 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
33591 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
33594 \begin_layout Itemize
33595 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
33596 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
33601 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
33602 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
33603 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
33604 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
33607 \begin_layout Itemize
33612 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
33613 code in the name of the index.
33616 \begin_layout Section
33617 Nomenclature/Glossary
33618 \begin_inset Index idx
33621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33628 \begin_inset Index idx
33631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33660 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33662 name "sec:Nomenclature"
33669 \begin_layout Standard
33670 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
33671 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
33672 called nomenclature or glossary.
33675 \begin_layout Standard
33676 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33683 \begin_inset Index idx
33686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33694 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33696 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33703 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33707 \begin_layout Standard
33708 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
33709 and then use the menu
33711 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33717 \begin_inset space ~
33722 or the toolbar button
33725 arg "nomencl-insert"
33730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33741 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
33744 \begin_layout Standard
33745 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
33746 The first is the term or
33750 that you wish to define.
33755 of the term or symbol.
33758 \begin_layout Standard
33759 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33767 To use \SpecialChar TeX
33768 code for nomenclature entries the option
33772 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
33780 \begin_layout Subsection
33781 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
33782 \begin_inset Index idx
33785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33786 Nomenclature ! Layout
33794 \begin_layout Standard
33795 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
33799 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
33802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33806 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33814 \begin_inset Newline newline
33822 \begin_inset Newline newline
33828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33835 character starts/ends the formula.
33836 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
33837 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
33839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33849 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
33859 \begin_layout Standard
33860 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33861 syntax is given in section
33862 \begin_inset space ~
33866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33868 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33875 \begin_layout Standard
33879 \begin_inset space ~
33884 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
33886 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
33887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33891 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33898 in this document is:
33899 \begin_inset Newline newline
33904 dummy entry for the character
33909 \begin_inset Newline newline
33921 \begin_inset space ~
33931 font use the command
33960 \begin_layout Standard
33961 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
33962 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33966 \begin_inset space \space{}
33970 \begin_inset Newline newline
33986 \begin_inset Newline newline
33989 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
33990 This command will make the font of all symbols
33997 \begin_inset space ~
34005 \begin_layout Standard
34006 If the characters |
34007 \begin_inset space \space{}
34011 \begin_inset space \space{}
34015 \begin_inset space \space{}
34019 \begin_inset space \space{}
34023 \begin_inset space \space{}
34026 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
34027 code they need to be escaped
34028 by adding a quote character in front of them.
34029 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34030 LatexCommand nomenclature
34031 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
34032 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
34040 \begin_layout Subsection
34041 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
34042 \begin_inset Index idx
34045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34046 Nomenclature ! Sort order
34054 \begin_layout Standard
34055 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34056 -code of the symbol
34058 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
34060 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
34063 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34064 LatexCommand nomenclature
34066 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
34074 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34078 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34079 LatexCommand nomenclature
34082 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
34088 They will be sorted by
34089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34115 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34118 will be sorted before the
34122 since the character
34123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34130 is considered in sorting.
34133 \begin_layout Standard
34134 To control the sort order, you can edit the
34137 \begin_inset space ~
34142 field of the nomenclature dialog.
34143 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
34145 For the example given, you can insert
34149 in this field for the
34150 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34157 will be located before
34158 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34164 \begin_layout Standard
34165 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
34170 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34180 \begin_layout Subsection
34181 Nomenclature Options
34182 \begin_inset Index idx
34185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34186 Nomenclature ! Options
34192 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34194 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
34201 \begin_layout Standard
34206 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
34207 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
34210 \begin_layout Description
34211 refeq Appends the phrase
34212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34227 to every nomenclature entry, where
34233 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
34236 \begin_layout Description
34237 refpage Appends the phrase
34238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34253 to every nomenclature entry, where
34259 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
34262 \begin_layout Description
34263 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
34266 \begin_layout Standard
34267 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
34268 class options list in the
34270 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34274 In this document the options
34281 \begin_layout Standard
34282 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34288 \begin_layout Standard
34289 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
34290 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
34295 field in the nomenclature dialog:
34298 \begin_layout Description
34308 \begin_layout Description
34311 nomrefpage Like the
34318 \begin_layout Description
34321 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
34330 \begin_layout Description
34334 \begin_inset space ~
34340 \begin_inset space ~
34345 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
34348 \begin_layout Standard
34350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34357 are automatically translated for most document languages.
34358 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
34362 \begin_layout Standard
34371 \begin_inset Newline newline
34377 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34381 \begin_inset space ~
34393 unskip, see equation
34396 \begin_inset Newline newline
34403 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34404 \begin_inset Newline newline
34410 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34414 \begin_inset space ~
34431 \begin_layout Standard
34432 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
34435 \begin_inset space ~
34440 in the document settings under
34443 \begin_inset space ~
34451 \begin_layout Standard
34459 \begin_inset Newline newline
34463 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34467 \begin_inset space ~
34479 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
34481 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
34482 \begin_inset Newline newline
34489 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34490 \begin_inset Newline newline
34494 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34498 \begin_inset space ~
34510 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
34515 \begin_layout Subsection
34516 Printing the Nomenclature
34517 \begin_inset Index idx
34520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34521 Nomenclature ! Printing
34529 \begin_layout Standard
34530 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
34532 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34533 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34549 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
34550 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
34551 You can choose between these settings:
34554 \begin_layout Description
34555 Default a space of 1
34556 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34562 \begin_layout Description
34564 \begin_inset space ~
34568 \begin_inset space ~
34571 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
34574 \begin_layout Description
34575 Custom custom space
34578 \begin_layout Standard
34579 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
34580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34588 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
34596 For example, in order to change the name to
34600 , add the following line to the preamble:
34603 \begin_layout Standard
34616 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
34619 \begin_layout Standard
34620 When you are using another document language than English, replace
34621 \begin_inset Newline newline
34636 , where *** is the name of the language used.
34639 \begin_layout Subsection
34640 Nomenclature Program
34641 \begin_inset Index idx
34644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34645 Nomenclature ! Program
34651 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34653 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
34660 \begin_layout Standard
34666 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
34667 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
34669 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
34674 by adding options, see section
34675 \begin_inset space ~
34679 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34681 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
34686 The available options are listed and explained in
34687 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34689 key "nomencl,makeindex"
34697 \begin_layout Section
34699 \begin_inset Index idx
34702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34709 \begin_inset Index idx
34712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34713 Document ! Branches
34719 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34721 name "sec:Branches"
34728 \begin_layout Standard
34729 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
34730 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
34731 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
34732 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
34735 \begin_layout Standard
34736 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
34737 allows you to put text into branches.
34738 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
34739 To create a branch, either select the menu
34741 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34742 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
34745 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
34747 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34754 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
34755 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
34756 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
34757 and whether the name of the branch should
34758 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
34759 (see below for an example).
34760 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
34761 to the name of the other) and to add
34762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34770 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34774 \begin_inset space ~
34777 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
34778 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
34781 \begin_layout Standard
34782 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
34783 These boxes are inserted via the menu
34785 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34788 where you can choose a branch.
34789 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
34793 \begin_layout Standard
34794 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
34795 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
34798 \begin_layout Standard
34799 \begin_inset Branch Question
34803 \begin_layout Standard
34808 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
34816 \begin_layout Standard
34817 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34821 \begin_layout Standard
34826 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
34834 \begin_layout Standard
34841 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34842 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34845 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
34846 Consider for example a file
34847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34854 which has the above branches.
34856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34863 is active, the PDF export file would be called
34864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34887 branch were inactive,
34888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34903 branch was active, likewise
34904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34919 branch was active, and
34920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34923 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
34924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34927 if both branches were active.
34928 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
34929 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34935 \begin_layout Standard
34936 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
34942 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
34943 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
34947 \begin_inset space ~
34955 \begin_layout Standard
34956 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34960 \begin_layout Standard
34966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34973 branch is deactivated.
34979 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34985 \begin_layout Standard
34986 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
34987 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
34988 definitions for each branch.
34989 For example you can define for the question branch
34993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34994 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34995 -syntax, see section
34996 \begin_inset space ~
35000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35002 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
35014 \begin_layout Standard
35024 \begin_layout Standard
35034 \begin_layout Standard
35035 and for the answer branch
35038 \begin_layout Standard
35048 \begin_layout Standard
35058 \begin_layout Standard
35059 \begin_inset Branch Question
35063 \begin_layout Standard
35067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35095 \begin_layout Standard
35096 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35100 \begin_layout Standard
35104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35132 \begin_layout Standard
35133 Now it is possible to use the
35137 question{\SpecialChar ldots
35144 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
35147 commands to obtain conditional output.
35148 Here is an example formula where only the
35155 \begin_inset Formula
35157 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
35165 \begin_layout Standard
35166 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
35174 \begin_layout Standard
35175 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
35177 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35181 \begin_inset space \space{}
35184 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
35186 For this advanced usage, see the
35192 Flex insets and InsetLayout
35197 \begin_layout Section
35199 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35201 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
35206 \begin_inset Index idx
35209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35218 \begin_layout Standard
35221 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35222 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35225 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
35227 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35233 \begin_inset Index idx
35236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35238 packages ! hyperref
35243 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
35244 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
35245 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
35246 part of the document.
35249 \begin_layout Standard
35250 The header information in the dialog tab
35254 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
35255 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
35256 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
35257 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
35261 \begin_inset space ~
35265 \begin_inset space ~
35270 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
35271 tries to extract the header information from your document title
35272 and author entries.
35276 \begin_inset space ~
35280 \begin_inset space ~
35284 \begin_inset space ~
35289 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
35292 \begin_layout Standard
35293 You can specify in the dialog tab
35297 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
35302 \begin_inset space ~
35306 \begin_inset space ~
35310 \begin_inset space ~
35315 option allows long links to be split;
35318 \begin_inset space ~
35322 \begin_inset space ~
35326 \begin_inset space ~
35334 \begin_inset space ~
35339 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
35342 \begin_inset space ~
35347 colors the different links.
35348 The default colors are:
35351 \begin_layout Labeling
35352 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35357 for hyperlinks and URLs
35360 \begin_layout Labeling
35361 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35369 \begin_layout Labeling
35370 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35378 \begin_layout Standard
35379 but you can change these in the field
35384 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
35387 \begin_layout Standard
35390 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
35393 \begin_layout Standard
35398 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
35399 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
35400 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
35403 \begin_layout Standard
35408 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
35409 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
35410 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
35420 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
35421 when opening the PDF.
35423 \begin_inset space ~
35426 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
35427 \begin_inset space ~
35430 1 will only display the sections.
35433 \begin_layout Standard
35434 PDF properties are also used in this document.
35435 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
35441 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
35442 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35452 \begin_layout Section
35454 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35456 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35458 name "sec:TeX-Code"
35465 \begin_layout Subsection
35468 \begin_inset Index idx
35471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35479 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35481 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
35488 \begin_layout Standard
35489 As \SpecialChar LyX
35490 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
35491 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
35492 commands and constructs,
35495 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
35496 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
35497 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
35498 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35499 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
35500 cannot support all packages and
35504 \begin_layout Standard
35505 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
35506 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
35507 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
35511 Code box is created by the menu
35513 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35515 \begin_inset space ~
35520 or by the toolbar button
35533 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
35541 \begin_layout Standard
35542 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
35544 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
35546 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
35550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35551 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
35556 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35563 , you can write the command part
35569 in a \SpecialChar TeX
35570 Code box before the word and the closing brace
35574 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
35575 Code box behind the word.
35576 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
35577 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
35581 \begin_layout Standard
35582 \begin_inset Graphics
35583 filename clipart/ERT.png
35591 \begin_layout Standard
35595 \begin_layout Standard
35596 This is a line with a
35600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35623 \begin_layout Standard
35624 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35632 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35633 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
35634 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
35635 know that the command is finished.
35643 \begin_layout Subsection
35644 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35646 \begin_inset Argument 1
35649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35650 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
35657 \begin_inset Index idx
35660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35668 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35670 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
35677 \begin_layout Standard
35678 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
35679 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35680 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
35681 uses in the background.
35682 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
35683 is based on commands, you can
35684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35692 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
35693 any time if you know the right commands.
35694 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
35695 is the end of the day.
35696 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
35697 all caption labels bold.
35698 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
35700 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
35704 \begin_layout Standard
35705 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
35707 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35709 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35712 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35722 \begin_layout Standard
35723 As result you find that the package
35728 \begin_inset Index idx
35731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35739 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
35741 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35744 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35748 \begin_inset space ~
35756 \begin_layout Standard
35761 usepackage[options]{package name}
35764 \begin_layout Standard
35765 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
35766 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
35767 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
35768 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
35771 \begin_layout Standard
35772 In your case the package name is
35777 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
35782 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
35783 So you add the command
35786 \begin_layout Standard
35791 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
35794 \begin_layout Standard
35795 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
35799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35800 For more commands provided by the
35804 package, have a look at its documentation,
35805 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35820 \begin_layout Standard
35821 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
35823 For example if you use a
35827 class, you don't need the package
35831 , you can instead write
35834 \begin_layout Standard
35839 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
35844 \begin_layout Standard
35845 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
35846 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
35847 documentation of the document class you want to use.
35854 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
35857 \begin_layout Standard
35858 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
35859 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
35861 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35862 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
35863 Code box as described in the previous
35867 \begin_layout Standard
35868 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
35869 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35872 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35874 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
35882 \begin_layout Standard
35883 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35889 \begin_layout Standard
35893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35903 \begin_inset Note Note
35906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35907 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
35915 \begin_layout Left Header
35916 \begin_inset Argument 1
35919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35939 \begin_inset Note Note
35942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35943 defines the header line as described below
35951 \begin_layout Center Header
35952 \begin_inset Argument 1
35955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35964 \begin_layout Right Header
35965 \begin_inset Argument 1
35968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35989 \begin_layout Left Footer
35990 \begin_inset Argument 1
35993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36014 \begin_layout Center Footer
36015 \begin_inset Argument 1
36018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36030 \begin_inset Newline newline
36034 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
36040 \begin_layout Right Footer
36041 \begin_inset Argument 1
36044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36066 \begin_layout Section
36067 Customized Page Headers and Footers
36068 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36070 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
36075 \begin_inset Index idx
36078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36079 Document ! Header/Footer line
36085 \begin_inset Index idx
36088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36097 \begin_layout Standard
36098 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
36102 \begin_inset space ~
36113 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36119 \begin_inset space ~
36125 As a second step add in the menu
36127 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36128 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36137 Custom Header/Footerlines
36140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36144 This module offers the following 6
36145 \begin_inset space ~
36151 \begin_layout Description
36153 \begin_inset space ~
36157 \begin_inset space ~
36161 \begin_inset space ~
36165 \begin_inset space ~
36169 \begin_inset space ~
36175 \begin_layout Description
36177 \begin_inset space ~
36181 \begin_inset space ~
36185 \begin_inset space ~
36189 \begin_inset space ~
36193 \begin_inset space ~
36199 \begin_layout Standard
36200 for the different positions in the header/footer.
36201 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
36204 \begin_layout Standard
36205 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
36206 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
36208 \begin_inset space ~
36212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36214 reference "fig:Page-layout"
36218 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
36221 \begin_layout Standard
36222 \begin_inset Float figure
36229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36232 \begin_inset Tabular
36233 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
36234 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
36235 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36236 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36237 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36239 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
36251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36257 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36268 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36286 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36297 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
36300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36301 The normal text on the page goes here.
36302 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
36304 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
36305 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
36310 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36319 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36330 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36348 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36359 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
36371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36377 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36395 \begin_inset Caption Standard
36397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36398 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36400 name "fig:Page-layout"
36404 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
36417 \begin_layout Standard
36418 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36426 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
36430 \begin_inset space ~
36435 is set to “Default”.
36436 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
36445 \begin_layout Subsection
36449 \begin_layout Standard
36450 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
36451 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
36452 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
36453 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
36455 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
36457 Defining the footer line works similarly.
36460 \begin_layout Standard
36461 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
36462 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
36466 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36468 \begin_inset space ~
36476 \begin_layout Description
36479 thepage prints the current page number
36482 \begin_layout Description
36485 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
36488 \begin_layout Description
36491 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
36494 \begin_layout Description
36497 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
36498 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
36501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36505 \begin_inset Quotes prd
36508 because it usually goes in a left header.
36511 \begin_layout Description
36514 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
36515 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
36517 It is normally used in the right header.
36520 \begin_layout Subsection
36521 Default header/footer
36524 \begin_layout Standard
36525 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
36526 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
36527 footer has the page number.
36528 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
36529 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
36530 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
36533 \begin_inset space ~
36541 \begin_layout Subsection
36545 \begin_layout Standard
36546 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
36547 Some pages are different.
36548 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
36549 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
36550 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
36551 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
36552 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
36555 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36556 Header and footer decoration line
36559 \begin_layout Standard
36560 By default, you get a 0.4
36561 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36564 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
36565 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
36577 in the following way:
36580 \begin_layout Standard
36587 headrulewidth}{thickness}
36590 \begin_layout Standard
36591 where thickness is a size in standard units like
36604 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
36605 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36611 \begin_layout Standard
36612 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
36614 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
36615 \begin_inset space ~
36619 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36629 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36630 Several header/footer lines
36633 \begin_layout Standard
36634 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
36635 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
36636 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
36638 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36653 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36654 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36656 \begin_inset space ~
36664 \begin_layout Standard
36671 headheight}{height}
36674 \begin_layout Standard
36679 is a size in standard units (e.
36680 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36684 \begin_inset space \space{}
36692 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
36693 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
36694 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36695 logfile with the menu
36697 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36699 \begin_inset space ~
36707 \begin_inset space ~
36712 to see if you can find a warning about the package
36717 \begin_inset Index idx
36720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36722 packages ! fancyhdr
36728 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
36729 for your header/footer.
36732 \begin_layout Subsection
36736 \begin_layout Standard
36737 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
36738 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
36739 This example consists of the following definition:
36742 \begin_layout Description
36744 \begin_inset space ~
36753 , empty optional argument
36756 \begin_layout Description
36758 \begin_inset space ~
36761 Header empty, empty optional argument
36764 \begin_layout Description
36766 \begin_inset space ~
36775 in the optional argument
36778 \begin_layout Description
36780 \begin_inset space ~
36789 in the optional argument
36792 \begin_layout Description
36794 \begin_inset space ~
36807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36811 \begin_inset Newline newline
36815 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
36819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36822 in the optional argument
36825 \begin_layout Description
36827 \begin_inset space ~
36836 , empty optional argument
36839 \begin_layout Description
36842 headrulewidth set to 2
36843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36849 \begin_layout Standard
36850 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
36851 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
36857 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36867 \begin_layout Standard
36868 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
36874 \begin_layout Standard
36878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36882 pagestyle{headings}
36888 \begin_inset Note Note
36891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36892 switches back to page style with the default headings
36900 \begin_layout Section
36901 Previewing Snippets of your Document
36902 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36904 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36909 \begin_inset Index idx
36912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36919 \begin_inset Index idx
36922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36931 \begin_layout Standard
36933 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
36934 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
36935 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
36938 \begin_layout Subsection
36942 \begin_layout Standard
36943 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36949 \begin_inset Index idx
36952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36954 packages ! preview-latex
36959 (on some systems named simply
36964 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36966 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36973 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36975 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
36983 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
36984 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36985 -package are automatically
36986 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
36990 \begin_layout Subsection
36994 \begin_layout Standard
36995 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36996 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36998 activate the option
37001 \begin_inset space ~
37008 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37014 \begin_inset space ~
37018 \begin_inset space ~
37021 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
37028 \begin_inset space ~
37041 \begin_inset space ~
37046 is the multiplication factor for the size.
37049 \begin_layout Standard
37050 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
37055 \begin_inset space ~
37063 \begin_inset space ~
37071 \begin_layout Standard
37072 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
37073 and when you finish
37077 \begin_layout Standard
37078 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37086 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
37087 generated by activating the option
37090 \begin_inset space ~
37096 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
37104 \begin_layout Subsection
37105 Selected document parts
37108 \begin_layout Standard
37109 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
37110 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
37111 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
37112 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37114 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
37116 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37120 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
37121 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
37122 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
37125 \begin_layout Standard
37126 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37133 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37145 is explained in section
37147 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
37152 \begin_inset space ~
37162 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
37163 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
37164 the final rotated boxes,
37165 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
37166 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
37168 Here is the result:
37171 \begin_layout Standard
37172 \begin_inset Preview
37174 \begin_layout Standard
37179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37183 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
37189 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
37199 height_special "totalheight"
37204 backgroundcolor "none"
37207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37232 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
37238 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
37245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37260 \begin_layout Standard
37261 Previewing works also for colors.
37262 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37281 is explained in section
37288 \begin_inset space ~
37301 \begin_layout Standard
37302 \begin_inset Preview
37304 \begin_layout Standard
37308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37327 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
37332 This is text within a colored, framed box.
37336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37351 \begin_layout Standard
37352 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
37358 \begin_layout Standard
37359 If \SpecialChar LyX
37360 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
37361 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
37362 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
37363 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37364 packages in your document preamble that are required by
37365 the \SpecialChar TeX
37367 If \SpecialChar LyX
37368 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
37369 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
37371 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
37372 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
37373 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
37376 \begin_layout Subsection
37381 \begin_layout Standard
37382 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37383 source of the whole document or parts of it.
37386 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
37388 \begin_inset space ~
37393 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37395 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
37397 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
37398 's main window, then only this selection
37399 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
37400 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
37401 the source view window.
37406 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
37407 ; but note that if you have
37408 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
37410 not just the one which is open at the time.
37413 \begin_layout Section
37414 Advanced Find and Replace
37415 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37417 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37422 \begin_inset Index idx
37425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37432 \begin_inset Index idx
37435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37444 \begin_layout Subsection
37448 \begin_layout Standard
37449 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
37450 allows for searching of complex,
37451 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
37453 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
37454 The key-features are:
37457 \begin_layout Itemize
37458 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
37459 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
37460 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
37464 \begin_layout Itemize
37465 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
37466 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
37467 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
37468 a section heading will only be found within section headings
37471 \begin_layout Itemize
37472 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
37473 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
37474 outside of mathematics environments
37477 \begin_layout Itemize
37478 Search may be widened to a specific
37483 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37487 \begin_inset space ~
37490 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
37491 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
37498 \begin_layout Itemize
37499 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
37500 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
37501 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37505 \begin_inset space ~
37508 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
37511 \begin_layout Subsection
37515 \begin_layout Standard
37516 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
37518 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37531 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
37534 ) or the toolbar button
37537 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
37543 Advanced Find and Replace
37548 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37552 \begin_layout Standard
37558 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
37562 \begin_inset space ~
37567 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
37570 arg "paragraph-break"
37574 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
37575 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
37579 arg "paragraph-break"
37582 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
37586 searches backwards.
37589 \begin_layout Standard
37593 \begin_inset space ~
37598 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
37607 \begin_inset space ~
37612 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
37615 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37616 Searching for mathematics
37619 \begin_layout Standard
37620 Mathematical formulas, such as
37621 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
37624 or something more complex like
37625 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
37628 , may be searched for by typing them in the
37633 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
37634 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
37635 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
37636 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
37642 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37646 \begin_layout Standard
37647 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
37648 This is done by switching to the
37652 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
37657 This way, entering in the
37664 \begin_layout Itemize
37665 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
37666 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
37669 \begin_layout Itemize
37670 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
37671 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
37674 \begin_layout Itemize
37675 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
37676 of it only within section headings.
37677 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
37678 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
37682 \begin_layout Itemize
37683 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
37684 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
37687 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37691 \begin_layout Standard
37692 The entries made in the
37696 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
37699 \begin_inset space ~
37705 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
37709 button or alternatively press
37712 arg "paragraph-break"
37719 while the cursor is in the
37722 \begin_inset space ~
37730 \begin_layout Standard
37731 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
37733 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
37737 \begin_layout Itemize
37738 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
37739 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
37740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37747 with its typewriter version
37748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37762 \begin_layout Itemize
37763 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
37765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37769 \begin_inset Formula $R$
37773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37781 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
37785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37788 (you may want to enable the
37791 \begin_inset space ~
37799 \begin_inset space ~
37804 options and disable the
37812 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
37813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37820 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
37821 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
37825 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
37828 , or occurrences of
37829 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
37833 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
37839 \begin_layout Subsection
37843 \begin_layout Standard
37844 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
37848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37849 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
37851 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37853 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
37863 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
37869 This is done with the context menu
37871 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37872 Insert Regular Expression
37874 while the cursor is in the
37879 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
37880 expression matching rules
37884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37885 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
37888 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37892 \begin_inset space ~
37895 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
37896 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
37902 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
37903 same text in the document.
37904 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
37905 Examples of using such a feature may be:
37908 \begin_layout Enumerate
37909 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
37914 editor the fraction
37915 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
37919 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37922 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
37923 fractions with the given denominator.
37926 \begin_layout Enumerate
37927 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
37939 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37944 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
37945 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
37946 Also, by inserting a
37947 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37950 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
37951 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
37954 \begin_layout Standard
37955 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
37956 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
37957 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37960 , and referring back to them through
37961 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37965 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
37969 For example, try searching with the regexp
37970 \begin_inset Newline newline
37973 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
37976 \begin_inset Newline newline
37979 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
37982 \begin_layout Standard
37983 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
37986 \begin_layout Standard
37987 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37995 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
37996 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
37997 sub-expressions is absolute.
37999 \begin_inset space ~
38003 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
38006 always refers to the first occurrence of
38007 \begin_inset Formula $()$
38010 in all entered regexps.
38018 \begin_layout Section
38020 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38022 name "sec:Spellchecking"
38027 \begin_inset Index idx
38030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38039 \begin_layout Standard
38041 has a built-in spell checker.
38044 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38051 key or the toolbar button
38054 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38057 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
38058 beginning of the currently selected text.
38059 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
38060 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
38061 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
38062 scrolled so that it is visible.
38063 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
38064 n, if any could be found.
38065 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
38069 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
38070 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
38073 \begin_layout Standard
38074 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
38077 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38081 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
38082 a different one at the top of the dialog.
38084 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
38085 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
38088 \begin_inset space ~
38096 arg "dialog-show character"
38099 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
38101 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
38104 \begin_layout Standard
38105 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
38106 can be downloaded from here:
38107 \begin_inset Newline newline
38111 \begin_inset Flex URL
38114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38116 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069762
38118 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
38119 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069762
38120 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/dicts/
38128 \begin_inset Newline newline
38132 \change_deleted 244031559 1606070170
38134 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070176
38135 You should download
38138 \begin_inset space ~
38141 files for each language
38142 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070127
38147 link at the end of the opened webpage)
38150 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the
38151 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069925
38155 \begin_inset space ~
38158 files into \SpecialChar LyX
38159 's installation subfolder
38167 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
38169 \begin_inset Newline newline
38172 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
38173 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
38174 but in most cases these are
38190 is the language code.
38193 \begin_layout Subsection
38197 \begin_layout Standard
38200 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38201 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38203 \begin_inset space ~
38206 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38209 you can set the following things:
38212 \begin_layout Description
38214 \begin_inset space ~
38217 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
38218 should use for spell checking.
38219 Depending on your platform,
38229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38230 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
38231 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
38246 \begin_inset space ~
38249 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
38252 \begin_layout Description
38254 \begin_inset space ~
38257 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
38258 will always use the given language
38259 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
38262 \begin_layout Description
38264 \begin_inset space ~
38267 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
38269 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38273 \begin_inset space \space{}
38277 This should normally not be needed.
38280 \begin_layout Description
38282 \begin_inset space ~
38286 \begin_inset space ~
38289 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
38291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38301 \begin_layout Description
38303 \begin_inset space ~
38306 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
38307 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
38308 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
38309 appear in a context menu.
38310 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
38314 \begin_layout Description
38316 \begin_inset space ~
38320 \begin_inset space ~
38324 \begin_inset space ~
38327 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
38331 \begin_layout Section
38333 \begin_inset Index idx
38336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38345 name "sec:Thesaurus"
38352 \begin_layout Standard
38354 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
38355 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
38364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38365 \begin_inset CommandInset href
38367 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
38377 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
38379 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
38380 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
38381 which are available for many languages.
38384 \begin_layout Standard
38385 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
38386 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
38390 \begin_layout Subsection
38391 Setting up the thesaurus
38394 \begin_layout Standard
38403 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
38407 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
38412 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
38414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38418 \begin_inset space ~
38426 For instance, the US English files are named:
38429 \begin_layout Itemize
38433 \begin_layout Itemize
38437 \begin_layout Standard
38446 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
38447 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
38450 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38451 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38452 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38454 \begin_inset space ~
38459 ) to the path where they are installed.
38463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38464 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
38465 ies, typical locations are
38471 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
38475 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
38479 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
38482 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
38488 LibreOffice-<Version>
38495 On the Mac, the default location is
38497 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
38498 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
38499 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
38500 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
38501 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
38502 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
38510 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
38511 during the \SpecialChar LyX
38512 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
38516 \begin_layout Standard
38517 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
38519 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069849
38521 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069853
38524 thesaurus dictionaries, you can download them from here:
38525 \begin_inset Newline newline
38529 \begin_inset Flex URL
38532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38534 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069803
38536 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
38537 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069803
38538 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
38548 \begin_layout Standard
38549 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
38550 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
38552 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38553 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38554 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38556 \begin_inset space ~
38561 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
38563 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
38564 and point \SpecialChar LyX
38568 \begin_layout Standard
38569 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
38571 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
38574 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
38580 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
38583 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
38584 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
38586 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38592 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38593 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38594 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38596 \begin_inset space ~
38601 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
38604 \begin_layout Subsection
38605 Using the thesaurus
38608 \begin_layout Standard
38609 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
38611 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38614 or the toolbar button
38617 arg "thesaurus-entry"
38620 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
38622 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
38624 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
38625 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
38626 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
38635 ), related terms (such as
38638 \begin_inset space ~
38647 ), compounds (such as
38650 \begin_inset space ~
38659 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
38668 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
38671 \begin_layout Standard
38672 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
38673 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
38677 \begin_layout Standard
38678 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
38679 the dictionary, such as the above
38683 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
38684 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38688 \begin_inset space \space{}
38691 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
38692 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
38693 For example, looking up the word form
38697 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
38702 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
38703 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38707 \begin_inset space \space{}
38718 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
38719 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
38720 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
38723 \begin_layout Section
38725 \begin_inset Index idx
38728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38735 \begin_inset Index idx
38738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38739 Document ! Change Tracking
38745 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38747 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
38754 \begin_layout Standard
38755 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
38756 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
38757 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
38758 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
38760 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38762 \begin_inset space ~
38765 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38767 \begin_inset space ~
38775 \begin_layout Standard
38776 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
38790 The color depends on the author that made the change.
38791 You can change the color in
38793 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38794 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38796 \begin_inset space ~
38800 \begin_inset space ~
38805 \SpecialChar menuseparator
38811 \begin_inset Index idx
38814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38815 Color ! Change tracking
38820 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
38821 's status bar when the
38822 cursor is in changed text.
38823 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
38826 arg "changes-merge"
38832 \begin_layout Standard
38833 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
38835 \begin_inset Index idx
38838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38847 \begin_layout Standard
38848 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38854 \begin_layout Standard
38855 \begin_inset Graphics
38856 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
38864 \begin_layout Standard
38865 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38871 \begin_layout Standard
38872 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
38875 \begin_layout Standard
38876 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38882 \begin_layout Standard
38883 \begin_inset Tabular
38884 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
38885 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38886 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38887 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38888 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38897 arg "changes-track"
38905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38911 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38913 \begin_inset space ~
38916 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38918 \begin_inset space ~
38927 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38936 arg "changes-output"
38944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38950 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38952 \begin_inset space ~
38955 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38957 \begin_inset space ~
38961 \begin_inset space ~
38965 \begin_inset space ~
38974 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38995 Jumps to the next change
39001 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39010 arg "change-accept"
39018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39024 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39026 \begin_inset space ~
39029 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39031 \begin_inset space ~
39040 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39049 arg "change-reject"
39057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39063 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39065 \begin_inset space ~
39068 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39070 \begin_inset space ~
39079 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39088 arg "changes-merge"
39096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39102 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39104 \begin_inset space ~
39107 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39109 \begin_inset space ~
39118 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39127 arg "all-changes-accept"
39135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39141 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39143 \begin_inset space ~
39146 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39148 \begin_inset space ~
39152 \begin_inset space ~
39161 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39170 arg "all-changes-reject"
39178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39184 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39186 \begin_inset space ~
39189 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39191 \begin_inset space ~
39195 \begin_inset space ~
39204 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39227 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39228 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39230 \begin_inset space ~
39239 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39262 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
39264 \begin_inset space ~
39280 \begin_layout Standard
39281 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39287 \begin_layout Standard
39288 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
39308 \begin_layout Standard
39309 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
39310 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
39311 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
39312 the next change after the current cursor position.
39313 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
39314 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
39315 step to the next change.
39316 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
39319 \begin_layout Standard
39320 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
39321 to describe a change.
39324 \begin_layout Standard
39326 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
39327 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39333 \begin_inset Index idx
39336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39344 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
39346 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39353 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39359 \begin_layout Section
39360 Comparison of Documents
39361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39363 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
39368 \begin_inset Index idx
39371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39372 Comparison of documents
39380 \begin_layout Standard
39381 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
39384 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39388 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
39389 file with change tracking enabled showing the
39391 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
39393 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
39397 \begin_inset space ~
39401 \begin_inset space ~
39405 \begin_inset space ~
39414 \begin_inset space ~
39418 \begin_inset space ~
39422 \begin_inset space ~
39426 \begin_inset space ~
39430 \begin_inset space ~
39434 \begin_inset space ~
39439 enables the change tracking option
39442 \begin_inset space ~
39446 \begin_inset space ~
39450 \begin_inset space ~
39455 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
39458 \begin_layout Section
39459 International Support
39460 \begin_inset Index idx
39463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39464 International support
39472 \begin_layout Standard
39473 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
39474 with any language you want.
39475 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
39476 up \SpecialChar LyX
39478 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39480 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
39488 \begin_layout Standard
39489 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
39490 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
39491 \begin_inset space ~
39495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39497 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
39504 \begin_layout Subsection
39506 \begin_inset Index idx
39509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39516 \begin_inset Index idx
39519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39520 Document ! Settings
39526 \begin_inset Index idx
39529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39530 Document ! Language
39538 \begin_layout Standard
39541 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39542 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39545 dialog lets you set
39547 the language, the quote style and character encoding
39552 \begin_layout Standard
39557 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39562 \begin_inset space ~
39567 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
39568 For details about the different encoding options see section
39569 \begin_inset space ~
39573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39575 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
39582 \begin_layout Subsection
39583 Keyboard mapping configuration
39584 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39586 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
39593 \begin_layout Standard
39594 If you have for example a U.
39595 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39598 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
39599 can use an alternate keymap.
39600 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
39605 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39606 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39607 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
39610 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
39611 \begin_inset space ~
39615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39617 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
39622 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
39623 which one you want to use.
39626 \begin_layout Standard
39627 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
39628 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
39629 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
39630 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39633 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
39634 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
39635 one to support the characters you want.
39636 This and many other customizations are explained in the
39643 \begin_layout Chapter
39646 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39648 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
39655 \begin_layout Standard
39656 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
39657 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
39658 topic inside the user's guide.
39661 \begin_layout Section
39663 \begin_inset Index idx
39666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39675 \begin_layout Standard
39680 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
39683 \begin_layout Subsection
39687 \begin_layout Standard
39688 Creates a new document.
39691 \begin_layout Subsection
39695 \begin_layout Standard
39696 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
39697 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
39698 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
39700 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
39701 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
39707 \begin_layout Subsection
39711 \begin_layout Standard
39715 \begin_layout Subsection
39719 \begin_layout Standard
39720 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
39721 Click there on a file to open it.
39724 \begin_layout Subsection
39726 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
39730 \begin_layout Standard
39732 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
39733 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
39737 \begin_layout Subsection
39741 \begin_layout Standard
39742 Closes the current document.
39745 \begin_layout Subsection
39749 \begin_layout Standard
39750 Closes all opened documents.
39753 \begin_layout Subsection
39757 \begin_layout Standard
39758 Saves the actual document.
39761 \begin_layout Subsection
39765 \begin_layout Standard
39766 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
39767 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
39771 \begin_layout Subsection
39773 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
39777 \begin_layout Standard
39779 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
39780 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
39786 \begin_layout Subsection
39790 \begin_layout Standard
39791 Saves all opened documents.
39794 \begin_layout Subsection
39798 \begin_layout Standard
39799 Reloads the actual document from disk.
39802 \begin_layout Subsection
39806 \begin_layout Standard
39807 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
39808 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
39809 It is described in the section
39811 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
39816 Additional Features
39821 \begin_layout Subsection
39825 \begin_layout Standard
39826 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
39827 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
39829 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
39830 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
39834 \begin_layout Standard
39835 When using the menu entry
39838 \begin_inset space ~
39843 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
39847 \begin_inset space ~
39851 \begin_inset space ~
39855 \begin_inset space ~
39860 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
39861 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
39864 \begin_layout Subsection
39866 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39868 name "subsec:Export"
39875 \begin_layout Standard
39876 You can export your document to various file formats.
39877 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
39879 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
39880 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
39881 during its configuration.
39884 \begin_layout Standard
39885 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
39887 \begin_inset space ~
39891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39893 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
39900 \begin_layout Description
39906 \begin_inset space ~
39909 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
39911 \begin_inset space ~
39914 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
39915 \begin_inset Newline newline
39918 Since \SpecialChar LyX
39919 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
39923 \begin_layout Description
39924 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
39930 \begin_layout Description
39932 \begin_inset space ~
39935 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
39941 \begin_layout Description
39942 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
39943 's native DVI-format.
39944 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
39945 files paths or file names in your document.
39947 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
39954 \begin_layout Description
39955 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
39956 in files paths or file names
39959 \begin_layout Description
39961 \begin_inset space ~
39968 ) DVI-format using the program
39970 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39973 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
39977 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39985 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
39993 \begin_layout Description
39995 \begin_inset space ~
39998 (cropped) the same as
40002 but with cropped page margins.
40005 \begin_layout Description
40007 \begin_inset space ~
40010 Dot text file with code in the programming language
40014 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
40019 \begin_layout Description
40023 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40031 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
40039 \begin_layout Description
40041 \begin_inset space ~
40045 \begin_inset space ~
40048 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
40052 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
40060 \begin_layout Description
40064 \begin_inset space ~
40073 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40074 source that is compilable with the program
40076 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40080 \begin_layout Description
40084 \begin_inset space ~
40089 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40090 source, additionally all images used in the document
40091 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
40095 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
40098 \begin_layout Description
40102 \begin_inset space ~
40107 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40108 source code, additionally all images used in the document
40109 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
40117 \begin_layout Description
40121 \begin_inset space ~
40130 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40131 source that is compilable with the program
40137 \begin_layout Description
40139 \begin_inset space ~
40143 \begin_inset space ~
40150 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40151 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
40157 \begin_layout Description
40159 \begin_inset space ~
40162 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
40163 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
40165 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40169 \begin_inset space \space{}
40174 \begin_inset space ~
40178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40193 represent the version number)
40196 \begin_layout Description
40198 \begin_inset space ~
40202 \begin_inset space ~
40205 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
40206 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
40207 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40211 \begin_layout Description
40212 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
40213 's internal XHTML engine
40216 \begin_layout Description
40218 \begin_inset space ~
40222 \begin_inset space ~
40226 \begin_inset space ~
40230 \begin_inset space ~
40233 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
40238 For the conversion the program
40247 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40250 \begin_layout Description
40251 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
40256 \begin_layout Description
40258 \begin_inset space ~
40261 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
40263 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
40266 For the conversion the program
40275 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40278 \begin_layout Description
40280 \begin_inset space ~
40283 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
40284 For the conversion the program
40293 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40296 \begin_layout Description
40298 \begin_inset space ~
40301 (cropped) the same as
40304 \begin_inset space ~
40309 but with cropped page margins
40312 \begin_layout Description
40316 \begin_inset space ~
40321 PDF-format using the program
40325 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
40328 \begin_layout Description
40332 \begin_inset space ~
40336 \begin_inset space ~
40344 \begin_inset space ~
40349 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
40350 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40354 \begin_inset space \space{}
40357 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
40361 \begin_layout Description
40365 \begin_inset space ~
40370 PDF-format using the program
40372 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40375 , produces PDF-files directly
40378 \begin_layout Description
40382 \begin_inset space ~
40387 PDF-format using the program
40391 , produces PDF-files directly
40394 \begin_layout Description
40398 \begin_inset space ~
40403 PDF-format using the program
40407 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
40410 \begin_layout Description
40414 \begin_inset space ~
40419 PDF-format using the program
40424 , produces PDF-files directly
40427 \begin_layout Description
40431 \begin_inset space ~
40439 \begin_layout Description
40443 \begin_inset space ~
40447 \begin_inset space ~
40452 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
40453 and then exported as text using the program
40458 \begin_layout Description
40463 PostScript format using the program
40471 options see section
40472 \begin_inset space ~
40476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40478 reference "subsec:General-output"
40485 \begin_layout Description
40486 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40487 source and also code in the statistical programming
40501 it is possible to use
40505 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
40509 \begin_layout Standard
40510 If one of the menu entries
40517 \begin_inset space ~
40526 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40528 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40530 \begin_inset space ~
40534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40536 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40541 \begin_inset Index idx
40544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40545 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40554 \begin_layout Subsection
40558 \begin_layout Standard
40559 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
40560 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
40563 \begin_inset space ~
40567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40569 reference "sec:Paths"
40574 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
40583 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
40584 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
40585 's preferences as described in section
40586 \begin_inset space ~
40590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40592 reference "subsec:Converters"
40599 \begin_layout Subsection
40600 New and Close Window
40603 \begin_layout Standard
40604 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
40608 \begin_layout Subsection
40612 \begin_layout Standard
40613 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
40616 \begin_layout Section
40618 \begin_inset Index idx
40621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40630 \begin_layout Subsection
40634 \begin_layout Standard
40635 Described in section
40636 \begin_inset space ~
40640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40642 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
40649 \begin_layout Subsection
40650 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
40653 \begin_layout Standard
40654 Described in section
40655 \begin_inset space ~
40659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40661 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
40668 \begin_layout Subsection
40672 \begin_layout Standard
40673 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
40674 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
40677 \begin_layout Subsection
40681 \begin_layout Standard
40682 Selects the whole document.
40685 \begin_layout Subsection
40686 Find & Replace (Quick)
40689 \begin_layout Standard
40690 Described in section
40691 \begin_inset space ~
40695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40697 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
40704 \begin_layout Subsection
40705 Find & Replace (Advanced)
40708 \begin_layout Standard
40709 Described in section
40710 \begin_inset space ~
40714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40716 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
40723 \begin_layout Subsection
40724 Move Paragraph Up/Down
40727 \begin_layout Standard
40728 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
40732 \begin_layout Subsection
40734 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
40738 \begin_layout Standard
40740 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
40741 Described in section
40742 \begin_inset space ~
40746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40748 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40757 \begin_layout Subsection
40759 \begin_inset Index idx
40762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40763 Paragraph ! Settings
40771 \begin_layout Standard
40772 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
40773 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
40777 \begin_layout Standard
40778 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
40779 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
40785 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40786 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40788 \begin_inset space ~
40794 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
40798 \begin_layout Subsection
40800 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
40804 \begin_layout Standard
40806 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40807 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
40812 \begin_layout Enumerate
40814 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
40815 Customize text properties by means of the
40821 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
40824 ; this is described in section
40825 \begin_inset space ~
40829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40831 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40838 \begin_layout Enumerate
40840 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
40841 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
40843 Apply last settings
40846 \begin_layout Enumerate
40848 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40849 Change the casing of selected text (
40864 \begin_layout Subsection
40866 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
40870 \begin_layout Standard
40872 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
40873 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
40874 text styles (in the case of this document:
40896 \begin_inset space ~
40900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40902 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
40911 \begin_layout Subsection
40912 Table and Rows & Columns
40915 \begin_layout Standard
40916 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
40917 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
40918 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
40921 \begin_layout Subsection
40925 \begin_layout Standard
40926 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
40927 It will dissolve this inset.
40928 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
40932 \begin_layout Subsection
40936 \begin_layout Standard
40937 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
40938 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
40941 \begin_layout Subsection
40942 Increase/Decrease List Depth
40945 \begin_layout Standard
40946 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
40948 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
40949 \begin_inset space ~
40953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40955 reference "sec:Nesting"
40960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40962 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
40969 \begin_layout Section
40971 \begin_inset Index idx
40974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40983 \begin_layout Standard
40984 At the bottom of the
40988 menu the opened documents are listed.
40991 \begin_layout Subsection
40992 Open/Close all Insets
40995 \begin_layout Standard
40996 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
40999 \begin_layout Subsection
41000 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
41003 \begin_layout Standard
41004 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
41007 \begin_layout Standard
41008 Math macros are described in the
41015 \begin_layout Subsection
41019 \begin_layout Standard
41020 Shows the outline window as described in sections
41021 \begin_inset space ~
41025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41027 reference "sec:Navigating"
41032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41034 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
41041 \begin_layout Subsection
41045 \begin_layout Standard
41046 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
41048 \begin_inset space ~
41052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41054 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41061 \begin_layout Subsection
41065 \begin_layout Standard
41066 Opens a window showing console messages.
41067 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
41069 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41072 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
41073 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
41074 is processing the document.
41077 \begin_layout Subsection
41079 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41081 name "subsec:Toolbars"
41086 \begin_inset Index idx
41089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41098 \begin_layout Standard
41099 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
41101 All toolbars and the
41104 \begin_inset space ~
41109 can be turned on and off.
41114 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
41126 \begin_inset space ~
41138 \begin_inset space ~
41143 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
41147 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
41154 \begin_layout Standard
41159 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
41163 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
41164 or when a certain feature is enabled.
41165 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
41166 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
41167 is inside a formula or table respectively.
41170 \begin_layout Standard
41172 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
41173 \begin_inset space ~
41177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41179 reference "sec:Toolbars"
41186 \begin_layout Subsection
41190 \begin_layout Standard
41194 \begin_inset space ~
41198 \begin_inset space ~
41202 \begin_inset space ~
41206 \begin_inset space ~
41210 \begin_inset space ~
41214 \begin_inset space ~
41219 will split \SpecialChar LyX
41220 's main window vertically while
41223 \begin_inset space ~
41227 \begin_inset space ~
41231 \begin_inset space ~
41235 \begin_inset space ~
41239 \begin_inset space ~
41243 \begin_inset space ~
41248 will split it horizontally.
41249 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
41250 to view the same document, but at different positions.
41251 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
41252 three or more documents at the same time.
41253 To close a split view, use the menu
41256 \begin_inset space ~
41260 \begin_inset space ~
41268 \begin_layout Subsection
41272 \begin_layout Standard
41273 Closes a split view.
41276 \begin_layout Subsection
41280 \begin_layout Standard
41281 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
41282 so that you will see nothing but your text.
41283 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
41284 's main window fullscreen.
41285 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
41286 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
41289 \begin_layout Section
41291 \begin_inset Index idx
41294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41303 \begin_layout Subsection
41307 \begin_layout Standard
41308 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
41309 \begin_inset space ~
41313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41315 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
41326 \begin_layout Subsection
41328 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41330 name "subsec:Special-Character"
41337 \begin_layout Standard
41338 Here you can insert the following characters:
41341 \begin_layout Description
41346 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
41349 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
41350 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41351 -packages you have installed.
41352 You can get a complete display by checking
41355 \begin_inset space ~
41361 \begin_inset Newline newline
41365 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41373 Not all characters will be visible in the
41377 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
41378 dialog (see section
41379 \begin_inset space ~
41383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41385 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
41389 ) can display every character.
41397 \begin_layout Description
41398 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
41402 \begin_layout Description
41404 \begin_inset space ~
41408 \begin_inset space ~
41411 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
41412 \begin_inset space ~
41416 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41418 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
41425 \begin_layout Description
41427 \begin_inset space ~
41430 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
41433 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41434 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41440 \begin_layout Description
41442 \begin_inset space ~
41445 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
41448 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41449 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41455 \begin_layout Description
41457 \begin_inset space ~
41460 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
41464 \begin_layout Description
41466 \begin_inset space ~
41469 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
41473 \begin_layout Description
41475 \begin_inset space ~
41479 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
41480 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing
41486 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41491 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
41493 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41497 \begin_inset space \space{}
41500 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
41501 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
41507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41510 To insert a fraction use the command
41515 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41519 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
41525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41528 The visible space is hereby the character before the
41535 \begin_layout Description
41537 \begin_inset space ~
41540 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
41544 \begin_layout Description
41546 \begin_inset space ~
41550 \begin_inset Index idx
41553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41560 \begin_inset Index idx
41563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41564 Language ! Phonetic symbols
41569 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
41570 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
41572 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41578 \begin_inset Index idx
41581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41589 \begin_inset Newline newline
41592 More information about this feature can be found in the
41598 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
41604 \begin_layout Description
41605 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
41607 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
41608 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
41612 \begin_layout Subsection
41616 \begin_layout Standard
41617 Opens a submenu with the following options:
41620 \begin_layout Description
41621 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
41622 \begin_inset script superscript
41624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41633 \begin_layout Description
41634 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
41635 \begin_inset script subscript
41637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41646 \begin_layout Description
41648 \begin_inset space ~
41651 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
41652 \begin_inset space ~
41656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41658 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
41665 \begin_layout Description
41667 \begin_inset space ~
41670 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
41671 \begin_inset space ~
41675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41677 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
41684 \begin_layout Description
41686 \begin_inset space ~
41689 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
41690 \begin_inset space ~
41694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41696 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
41703 \begin_layout Description
41705 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
41707 \begin_inset space ~
41710 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
41712 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41716 \begin_inset space \space{}
41719 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
41720 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
41726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41729 To insert a fraction use the command
41734 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41738 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
41744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41747 The visible space is hereby the character before the
41756 \begin_layout Description
41758 \begin_inset space ~
41761 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
41762 \begin_inset space ~
41766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41768 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
41775 \begin_layout Description
41777 \begin_inset space ~
41780 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
41781 \begin_inset space ~
41785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41787 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
41794 \begin_layout Description
41796 \begin_inset space ~
41799 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
41800 \begin_inset space ~
41804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41806 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
41813 \begin_layout Description
41814 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
41815 \begin_inset space ~
41819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41821 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
41828 \begin_layout Description
41830 \begin_inset space ~
41833 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
41834 \begin_inset space ~
41838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41840 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
41847 \begin_layout Description
41849 \begin_inset space ~
41852 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
41853 \begin_inset space ~
41857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41859 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
41866 \begin_layout Description
41868 \begin_inset space ~
41872 \begin_inset space ~
41875 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
41878 \begin_inset space ~
41882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41884 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
41891 for a usage example.
41894 \begin_layout Description
41896 \begin_inset space ~
41900 \begin_inset space ~
41903 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
41904 \begin_inset space ~
41908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41910 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41917 \begin_layout Description
41919 \begin_inset space ~
41922 Break Inserts a forced line break that
41923 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
41926 justifies the remaining text as described in section
41927 \begin_inset space ~
41931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41933 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41940 \begin_layout Description
41942 \begin_inset space ~
41945 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
41946 \begin_inset space ~
41950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41952 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41959 \begin_layout Description
41961 \begin_inset space ~
41964 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
41965 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
41967 \begin_inset space ~
41971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41973 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41980 \begin_layout Description
41982 \begin_inset space ~
41985 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
41986 \begin_inset space ~
41990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41992 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41999 \begin_layout Description
42001 \begin_inset space ~
42005 \begin_inset space ~
42008 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
42009 \begin_inset space ~
42013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42015 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
42022 \begin_layout Subsection
42024 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
42028 \begin_layout Standard
42030 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
42031 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
42032 The submenu allows you to insert
42035 \begin_layout Description
42037 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
42039 \begin_inset space ~
42042 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
42045 \begin_layout Description
42047 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
42049 \begin_inset space ~
42053 \begin_inset space ~
42056 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
42060 \begin_layout Description
42062 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
42064 \begin_inset space ~
42067 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
42070 \begin_layout Description
42072 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
42074 \begin_inset space ~
42077 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
42080 \begin_layout Description
42082 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
42084 \begin_inset space ~
42088 \begin_inset space ~
42091 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
42095 \begin_layout Description
42097 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
42099 \begin_inset space ~
42102 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
42105 \begin_layout Description
42107 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
42109 \begin_inset space ~
42113 \begin_inset space ~
42117 \begin_inset space ~
42120 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
42123 \begin_layout Description
42125 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
42127 \begin_inset space ~
42130 Name inserts the user name as specified in
42132 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42133 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42139 \begin_layout Description
42141 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
42143 \begin_inset space ~
42146 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
42148 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42149 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42155 \begin_layout Description
42157 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
42158 Other\SpecialChar ldots
42159 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
42160 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
42163 \begin_layout Subsection
42166 List/Contents/References
42169 \begin_layout Standard
42170 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
42174 \begin_inset space ~
42195 are described in section
42196 \begin_inset space ~
42200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42202 reference "sec:toc"
42211 is described in section
42212 \begin_inset space ~
42216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42218 reference "sec:Index"
42226 is described in section
42227 \begin_inset space ~
42231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42233 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
42239 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
42242 is described in section
42243 \begin_inset space ~
42247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42249 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
42256 \begin_layout Subsection
42260 \begin_layout Standard
42261 To insert floats, as described in section
42262 \begin_inset space ~
42266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42268 reference "sec:Floats"
42272 and in detail the chapter
42279 \begin_inset space ~
42287 \begin_layout Subsection
42291 \begin_layout Standard
42292 To insert notes, described in section
42293 \begin_inset space ~
42297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42299 reference "sec:Notes"
42306 \begin_layout Subsection
42310 \begin_layout Standard
42311 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
42313 Branches are described in section
42314 \begin_inset space ~
42318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42320 reference "sec:Branches"
42327 \begin_layout Subsection
42331 \begin_layout Standard
42332 Inserts document class-specific insets.
42333 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
42335 An example is the document class
42336 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
42338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42346 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
42350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42355 with three custom insets.
42358 Flex insets and InsetLayout
42362 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
42368 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
42371 \begin_layout Subsection
42373 \begin_inset Index idx
42376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42385 \begin_layout Standard
42386 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
42388 For more information see chapter
42390 External Document Parts
42393 \begin_inset space ~
42399 \begin_layout Subsection
42401 \begin_inset Index idx
42404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42413 \begin_layout Standard
42414 Inserts a box in a certain style.
42415 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
42422 \begin_inset space ~
42430 \begin_layout Subsection
42434 \begin_layout Standard
42439 dialog as described in section
42440 \begin_inset space ~
42444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42446 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42453 \begin_layout Subsection
42457 \begin_layout Standard
42462 as described in section
42463 \begin_inset space ~
42467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42469 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42476 \begin_layout Subsection
42480 \begin_layout Standard
42485 as described in section
42486 \begin_inset space ~
42490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42492 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42499 \begin_layout Subsection
42501 \begin_inset Index idx
42504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42511 \begin_inset Index idx
42514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42515 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
42523 \begin_layout Standard
42524 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
42525 Floats are described in section
42526 \begin_inset space ~
42530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42532 reference "sec:Floats"
42536 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
42539 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
42547 \begin_inset space ~
42555 \begin_layout Subsection
42559 \begin_layout Standard
42560 Inserts an index entry as described in section
42561 \begin_inset space ~
42565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42567 reference "sec:Index"
42574 \begin_layout Subsection
42578 \begin_layout Standard
42579 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
42580 \begin_inset space ~
42584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42586 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
42593 \begin_layout Subsection
42597 \begin_layout Standard
42598 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
42599 Tables are described in section
42600 \begin_inset space ~
42604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42606 reference "sec:Tables"
42610 and in detail in the chapter
42617 \begin_inset space ~
42625 \begin_layout Subsection
42629 \begin_layout Standard
42635 Graphics are described in section
42636 \begin_inset space ~
42640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42642 reference "sec:Graphics"
42649 \begin_layout Subsection
42653 \begin_layout Standard
42654 Inserts a URL as described in section
42655 \begin_inset space ~
42659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42661 reference "subsec:URLs"
42668 \begin_layout Subsection
42672 \begin_layout Standard
42673 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
42674 \begin_inset space ~
42678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42680 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
42687 \begin_layout Subsection
42691 \begin_layout Standard
42692 Inserts a footnote as described in section
42693 \begin_inset space ~
42697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42699 reference "sec:Footnotes"
42706 \begin_layout Subsection
42710 \begin_layout Standard
42711 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
42712 \begin_inset space ~
42716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42718 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
42725 \begin_layout Subsection
42728 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
42731 \begin_layout Standard
42732 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
42733 environments of the same type.
42735 \begin_inset space ~
42739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42741 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
42745 for an explanation.
42748 \begin_layout Subsection
42752 \begin_layout Standard
42753 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
42754 title or caption of a float.
42755 Inserts a short title as described in section
42756 \begin_inset space ~
42760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42762 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
42769 \begin_layout Subsection
42774 \begin_layout Standard
42775 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
42776 Code box as described in section
42777 \begin_inset space ~
42781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42783 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
42790 \begin_layout Subsection
42792 \begin_inset Index idx
42795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42804 \begin_layout Standard
42805 Inserts a program listings box.
42806 Program listings are explained in the chapter
42808 Program Code Listings
42813 \begin_inset space ~
42821 \begin_layout Subsection
42823 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42827 \begin_layout Standard
42829 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42830 Inserts the actual date.
42831 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
42838 \begin_layout Subsection
42842 \begin_layout Standard
42843 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
42844 \begin_inset space ~
42848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42850 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42857 \begin_layout Section
42859 \begin_inset Index idx
42862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42871 \begin_layout Standard
42872 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
42873 \begin_inset space ~
42876 of the current document.
42877 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
42880 \begin_layout Subsection
42884 \begin_layout Standard
42885 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
42886 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
42887 to jump, for example, between section
42888 \begin_inset space ~
42892 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
42893 \begin_inset space ~
42896 2.5 and use the submenu
42899 \begin_inset space ~
42903 \begin_inset space ~
42910 \begin_inset space ~
42916 \begin_inset space ~
42920 \begin_inset space ~
42926 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
42930 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
42936 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
42939 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
42942 \begin_layout Standard
42943 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
42947 \begin_inset space ~
42952 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
42955 \begin_inset space ~
42960 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
42963 \begin_layout Subsection
42964 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
42967 \begin_layout Standard
42968 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
42972 \begin_layout Subsection
42976 \begin_layout Standard
42977 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
42978 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
42979 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
42983 \begin_inset space ~
42987 \begin_inset space ~
42995 \begin_layout Subsection
42999 \begin_layout Standard
43000 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
43003 The \SpecialChar LyX
43004 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
43006 \begin_inset space ~
43014 \begin_inset space ~
43019 manual for a detailed description.
43022 \begin_layout Section
43024 \begin_inset Index idx
43027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43036 \begin_layout Subsection
43040 \begin_layout Standard
43041 Change Tracking is described in section
43042 \begin_inset space ~
43046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43048 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43055 \begin_layout Subsection
43063 \begin_layout Standard
43064 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
43065 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
43066 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43068 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
43069 to the clipboard or update the view.
43070 \begin_inset Newline newline
43073 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43077 \begin_layout Standard
43080 Open Containing Directory
43082 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
43083 's temporary folder for the document.
43084 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
43085 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
43086 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
43087 For example some journals require to send the
43091 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
43095 \begin_layout Subsection
43096 Start Appendix Here
43099 \begin_layout Standard
43100 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
43101 as described in section
43102 \begin_inset space ~
43106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43108 reference "sec:Appendices"
43115 \begin_layout Subsection
43117 \begin_inset space ~
43123 \begin_layout Standard
43124 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
43125 default output format for the document (menu
43127 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43128 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43129 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43131 \begin_inset space ~
43135 \begin_inset space ~
43141 \begin_inset space ~
43145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43147 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43151 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
43154 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43155 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43157 \begin_inset space ~
43160 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43162 \begin_inset space ~
43165 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43167 \begin_inset space ~
43171 \begin_inset space ~
43177 \begin_inset space ~
43181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43183 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43187 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
43188 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
43190 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43191 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43193 \begin_inset space ~
43196 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43198 \begin_inset space ~
43201 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43205 \begin_inset space ~
43209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43211 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43216 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
43217 when it is first configured.
43218 The default output format is
43221 \begin_inset space ~
43229 \begin_layout Subsection
43230 View (Other Formats)
43233 \begin_layout Standard
43234 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
43235 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
43236 actual document with an external program.
43237 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
43238 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43239 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
43241 All possible formats are listed in section
43242 \begin_inset space ~
43246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43248 reference "subsec:Export"
43253 You should at least see the menu entry
43258 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43260 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
43262 \begin_inset space ~
43266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43268 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
43273 \begin_inset Index idx
43276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43277 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43286 \begin_layout Standard
43287 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
43288 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
43290 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43291 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43293 \begin_inset space ~
43296 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43298 \begin_inset space ~
43301 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43305 \begin_inset space ~
43309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43311 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43316 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
43317 when it is first configured.
43320 \begin_layout Subsection
43322 \begin_inset space ~
43328 \begin_layout Standard
43329 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
43330 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
43333 \begin_layout Subsection
43334 Update (Other Formats)
43337 \begin_layout Standard
43338 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
43339 your document without opening a new viewer window.
43342 \begin_layout Subsection
43343 View Master Document
43346 \begin_layout Standard
43347 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
43349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43363 \begin_inset space ~
43368 manual for more information on this topic).
43369 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
43370 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
43374 \begin_inset space ~
43378 \begin_inset space ~
43383 generates the output of the whole book, while
43387 will just output the chapter alone.
43390 \begin_layout Standard
43391 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
43392 in the document settings (menu
43394 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43395 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43396 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43398 \begin_inset space ~
43402 \begin_inset space ~
43408 \begin_inset space ~
43412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43414 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43418 ) or in the preferences (menu
43420 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43421 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43423 \begin_inset space ~
43426 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43428 \begin_inset space ~
43431 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43433 \begin_inset space ~
43437 \begin_inset space ~
43443 \begin_inset space ~
43447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43449 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43456 \begin_layout Subsection
43457 Update Master Document
43460 \begin_layout Standard
43461 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
43463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43477 \begin_inset space ~
43482 manual for more information on this topic).
43483 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
43484 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
43487 \begin_layout Standard
43488 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
43489 in the document settings (menu
43491 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43492 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43493 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43495 \begin_inset space ~
43499 \begin_inset space ~
43505 \begin_inset space ~
43509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43511 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43515 ) or in the preferences (menu
43517 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43518 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43520 \begin_inset space ~
43523 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43525 \begin_inset space ~
43528 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43530 \begin_inset space ~
43534 \begin_inset space ~
43540 \begin_inset space ~
43544 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43546 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43553 \begin_layout Subsection
43555 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43557 name "subsec:Compressed"
43564 \begin_layout Standard
43565 Un/compresses the current document.
43566 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
43567 compression (see the
43569 Additional Features
43571 manual for details).
43574 \begin_layout Subsection
43578 \begin_layout Standard
43579 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
43582 \begin_layout Subsection
43586 \begin_layout Standard
43587 The document settings are described in appendix
43588 \begin_inset space ~
43592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43594 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
43601 \begin_layout Section
43603 \begin_inset Index idx
43606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43615 \begin_layout Subsection
43619 \begin_layout Standard
43620 Spell checking is explained in section
43621 \begin_inset space ~
43625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43627 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
43634 \begin_layout Subsection
43638 \begin_layout Standard
43639 The thesaurus is described in section
43640 \begin_inset space ~
43644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43646 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
43653 \begin_layout Subsection
43655 \begin_inset Index idx
43658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43665 \begin_inset Index idx
43668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43677 \begin_layout Standard
43678 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
43679 the highlighted document part.
43682 \begin_layout Subsection
43688 \begin_inset Index idx
43691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43692 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
43701 \begin_layout Standard
43702 Generates with the help of the program
43704 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
43707 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
43708 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
43709 This feature is not available on Windows.
43712 \begin_layout Subsection
43718 \begin_inset Index idx
43721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43731 \begin_layout Standard
43732 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43737 \begin_inset space ~
43742 to see the full filename paths.
43745 \begin_layout Subsection
43747 \begin_inset Index idx
43750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43759 \begin_layout Standard
43760 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
43761 files as described in section
43762 \begin_inset space ~
43766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43768 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
43775 \begin_layout Subsection
43777 \begin_inset Index idx
43780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43793 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43811 \begin_inset Index idx
43814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43815 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43824 \begin_layout Standard
43825 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
43826 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
43827 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43828 -packages and programs it needs; see
43830 \begin_inset space ~
43834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43836 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
43843 \begin_layout Subsection
43847 \begin_layout Standard
43852 dialog as described in detail in appendix
43853 \begin_inset space ~
43857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43859 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43866 \begin_layout Section
43868 \begin_inset Index idx
43871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43880 \begin_layout Standard
43881 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
43882 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
43884 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
43888 \begin_layout Standard
43892 \begin_inset space ~
43897 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
43898 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43899 packages and classes found
43900 by \SpecialChar LyX
43902 \begin_inset space ~
43906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43908 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
43915 \begin_layout Standard
43919 \begin_inset space ~
43924 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
43929 \begin_layout Section
43931 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43933 name "sec:Toolbars"
43940 \begin_layout Standard
43941 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
43942 \begin_inset space ~
43946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43948 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
43955 \begin_layout Standard
43956 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
43957 This is described in the
43959 Additional Features
43964 \begin_layout Subsection
43966 \begin_inset Index idx
43969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43978 \begin_layout Standard
43979 \begin_inset Graphics
43980 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
43988 \begin_layout Standard
43989 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43995 \begin_layout Standard
43996 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44013 \begin_inset Note Note
44016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44017 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
44022 manual for more information.
44030 \begin_layout Standard
44031 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44037 \begin_layout Standard
44038 \begin_inset Tabular
44039 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
44040 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44041 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44042 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44048 \begin_inset Graphics
44049 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
44059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44063 pull-down box for the environments
44076 \begin_layout Standard
44077 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
44083 \begin_layout Standard
44085 \begin_inset Tabular
44086 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
44087 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44088 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44089 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44090 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44113 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44120 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44143 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44150 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44173 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44180 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44189 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
44197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44203 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44210 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44219 arg "spelling-continuously"
44227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44231 Spellcheck continuously
44237 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44260 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44267 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44290 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44297 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44320 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44327 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44350 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44357 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44380 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44382 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
44387 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44396 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44405 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
44413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44419 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44425 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44429 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44438 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44445 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
44453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44459 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44461 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44465 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44469 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44478 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44487 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
44495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44501 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44502 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
44509 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44530 Emphasize text, function of the
44531 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
44534 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44536 \begin_inset space ~
44539 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44541 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
44547 arg "dialog-show character"
44558 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44579 Set text to noun style, function of the
44580 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
44583 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44585 \begin_inset space ~
44588 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44590 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
44596 arg "dialog-show character"
44607 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44613 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
44616 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
44624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44629 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
44632 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44639 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44645 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
44650 arg "textstyle-apply"
44660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44665 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
44666 Format text using the current settings in the
44668 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44670 \begin_inset space ~
44673 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44684 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44707 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44708 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44710 \begin_inset space ~
44719 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44728 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
44736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44742 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44749 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44756 arg "tabular-insert"
44764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44770 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44777 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44783 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
44786 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
44794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44799 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
44802 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44809 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44818 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
44826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44830 Toggle outline window on/off,
44832 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
44839 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44848 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
44856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44860 Toggle math toolbar on/off
44866 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44875 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
44883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44887 Toggle table toolbar on/off
44900 \begin_layout Subsection
44902 \begin_inset Index idx
44905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44914 \begin_layout Standard
44915 \begin_inset Graphics
44916 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
44924 \begin_layout Standard
44925 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44931 \begin_layout Standard
44932 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44936 \begin_layout Standard
44937 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44943 \begin_layout Standard
44944 \begin_inset Tabular
44945 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
44946 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44947 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44948 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44949 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44976 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44985 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
44993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45003 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45012 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
45020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45030 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45039 arg "layout-toggle List"
45047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45057 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45066 arg "layout-toggle Description"
45074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45084 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45093 arg "depth-increment"
45101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45107 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45109 \begin_inset space ~
45113 \begin_inset space ~
45122 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45131 arg "depth-decrement"
45139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45145 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45147 \begin_inset space ~
45151 \begin_inset space ~
45160 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45169 arg "float-insert figure"
45177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45183 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45184 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
45191 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45200 arg "float-insert table"
45208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45214 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45215 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
45222 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45245 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45252 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45261 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
45269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45275 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45282 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45291 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
45299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45305 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45312 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45335 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45337 \begin_inset space ~
45346 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45355 arg "nomencl-insert"
45363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45369 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45371 \begin_inset space ~
45380 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45389 arg "footnote-insert"
45397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45403 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45410 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45419 arg "marginalnote-insert"
45427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45433 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45435 \begin_inset space ~
45444 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45467 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45468 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
45470 \begin_inset space ~
45479 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45488 arg "box-insert Frameless"
45496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45502 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45509 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45532 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45539 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45562 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45564 \begin_inset space ~
45573 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45582 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
45590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45596 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45597 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
45604 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45613 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
45621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45627 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45628 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45630 \begin_inset space ~
45639 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45648 arg "dialog-show character"
45656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45662 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45664 \begin_inset space ~
45667 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
45674 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45680 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
45685 arg "textstyle-apply"
45693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45698 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
45699 Format text using the recent settings in the
45702 arg "dialog-show character"
45711 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45720 arg "layout-paragraph"
45728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45734 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45736 \begin_inset space ~
45745 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45754 arg "thesaurus-entry"
45762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45768 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45782 \begin_layout Subsection
45783 View/Update Toolbar
45784 \begin_inset Index idx
45787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45788 Toolbar ! View / Update
45796 \begin_layout Standard
45797 \begin_inset Graphics
45798 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
45805 \begin_layout Standard
45806 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45812 \begin_layout Standard
45813 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
45817 \begin_layout Standard
45818 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45824 \begin_layout Standard
45825 \begin_inset Tabular
45826 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
45827 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45828 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45829 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45830 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45853 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45860 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45869 arg "buffer-update"
45877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45883 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45890 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45899 arg "master-buffer-view"
45907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45913 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45915 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333746
45917 \begin_inset space ~
45923 \begin_inset space ~
45932 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45941 arg "master-buffer-update"
45949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45955 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45957 \begin_inset space ~
45961 \begin_inset space ~
45970 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45979 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
45987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45993 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45994 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45996 \change_deleted -131811572 1600333766
45998 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333762
46001 \SpecialChar menuseparator
46002 Synchronize with Output
46008 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46019 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
46029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46035 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46036 View (Other Formats)
46042 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46049 arg "update-others"
46053 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
46061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46067 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46068 Update (Other Formats)
46081 \begin_layout Standard
46083 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
46084 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
46090 \begin_layout Subsection
46094 \begin_layout Standard
46095 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
46096 \begin_inset space ~
46100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46102 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
46106 , the table toolbar
46107 \begin_inset Index idx
46110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46119 \begin_inset space ~
46124 manual and the math macro toolbar
46125 \begin_inset Index idx
46128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46141 \begin_layout Chapter
46142 The Document Settings
46143 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46145 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
46150 \begin_inset Index idx
46153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46154 Document ! Settings
46162 \begin_layout Standard
46166 \begin_inset space ~
46171 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
46172 is called with the menu
46174 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46178 You can save your document settings as default with the
46180 Save as Document Defaults
46182 button in any dialog.
46183 This will create a template named
46187 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
46188 when you create a new document without
46192 \begin_layout Standard
46197 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
46198 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
46201 \begin_layout Standard
46202 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
46203 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
46204 to find the one you are looking for.
46205 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
46206 the submenus of the dialog.
46208 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46212 \begin_inset space \space{}
46216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46223 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
46224 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
46225 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
46228 \begin_layout Section
46232 \begin_layout Standard
46233 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
46235 Document classes are described in section
46236 \begin_inset space ~
46240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46242 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
46249 \begin_layout Standard
46253 \begin_inset space ~
46258 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
46263 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
46264 as a layout for a document class.
46265 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
46267 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
46276 \begin_layout Standard
46277 Some classes use special class options by default.
46278 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
46282 and you can decide to use them or not.
46283 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
46284 recommended you leave them untouched.
46289 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46290 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
46295 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46297 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
46302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46303 When you want to use one of the following drivers
46304 \begin_inset Newline newline
46309 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
46312 \begin_inset Newline newline
46315 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46316 distribution, see section
46321 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46323 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
46336 \begin_layout Standard
46341 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
46342 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
46343 in the background if the child document
46344 is opened without its master.
46345 This way child documents are always compilable.
46346 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
46353 \begin_inset space ~
46361 \begin_layout Standard
46362 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46373 \begin_inset Index idx
46376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46378 packages ! prettyref
46384 \begin_inset Index idx
46387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46389 packages ! refstyle
46394 for cross-references, see section
46395 \begin_inset space ~
46399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46401 reference "sec:Cross-References"
46408 \begin_layout Section
46412 \begin_layout Standard
46413 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
46414 Please refer to the section
46417 \begin_inset space ~
46425 \begin_inset space ~
46430 manual for details.
46433 \begin_layout Section
46437 \begin_layout Standard
46438 Modules are explained in section
46439 \begin_inset space ~
46443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46445 reference "subsec:Modules"
46452 \begin_layout Section
46456 \begin_layout Standard
46458 \begin_inset space ~
46462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46464 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
46471 \begin_layout Section
46475 \begin_layout Standard
46476 The document font settings are described in section
46477 \begin_inset space ~
46481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46483 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
46490 \begin_layout Section
46494 \begin_layout Standard
46495 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
46507 \begin_inset space ~
46512 and whether it should be a
46515 \begin_inset space ~
46520 can also be specified here.
46523 \begin_layout Standard
46524 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
46525 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
46526 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
46528 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
46531 \begin_layout Standard
46534 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
46537 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
46538 justifies the text on screen.
46539 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
46541 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
46545 \begin_layout Standard
46547 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
46556 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
46561 \begin_layout Section
46565 \begin_layout Standard
46566 This dialog is described in sections
46567 \begin_inset space ~
46571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46573 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
46578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46580 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
46587 \begin_layout Section
46591 \begin_layout Standard
46592 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
46593 \begin_inset space ~
46597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46599 reference "subsec:Margins"
46606 \begin_layout Section
46608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46610 name "sec:Language-encodings"
46615 \begin_inset Index idx
46618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46619 Language ! Encoding
46627 \begin_layout Standard
46628 The document language and quote styles are set here.
46629 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46630 (the \SpecialChar LyX
46632 is always encoded in utf8).
46633 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
46634 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
46635 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
46636 -command is not known for
46637 a particular character).
46638 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
46642 \begin_layout Standard
46644 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
46645 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46646 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
46647 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
46648 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
46649 's default encoding).
46650 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
46651 's Unicode support covers the
46652 characters of most scripts.
46653 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
46654 using one of the traditional, or
46655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46662 , encodings is necessary.
46665 \begin_layout Standard
46667 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
46669 provides support for these traditional encodings.
46672 Traditional (auto-selected)
46678 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
46679 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
46680 the given language(s).
46682 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
46686 \begin_layout Standard
46688 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
46689 If you use the option
46694 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
46697 If the document contains text in more than one language you
46698 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
46701 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46704 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
46705 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
46706 exactly one encoding.
46707 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
46712 \begin_layout Standard
46714 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
46715 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
46721 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
46722 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
46726 \begin_layout Standard
46728 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
46729 Finally, you can also select
46733 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
46734 Note that this encoding is then used for
46739 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
46740 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
46744 \begin_layout Standard
46746 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
46749 Do not load inputenc
46751 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
46752 from automatically loading the
46759 \begin_inset Index idx
46762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46764 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
46766 packages ! inputenc
46774 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
46775 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
46776 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
46777 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
46778 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
46780 Note that this option is only available for the standard
46786 Traditional (auto-selected)
46793 \begin_layout Standard
46795 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
46797 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
46798 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
46799 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46800 installation supports Unicode), choose
46801 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
46802 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46803 is quite incomplete, so
46804 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
46809 (when \SpecialChar LyX
46810 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46811 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
46812 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46813 -commands is not used, because all
46814 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
46815 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46816 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46817 , two new alternative engines
46818 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46820 Both engines support Unicode natively.
46822 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
46825 \begin_inset space ~
46833 \begin_inset space ~
46841 \begin_inset space ~
46847 \begin_inset space ~
46851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46853 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
46858 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
46862 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
46867 \begin_layout Standard
46871 \begin_inset space ~
46876 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46877 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
46879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46887 The possible settings are:
46890 \begin_layout Description
46891 Default uses the language package that is selected in
46893 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46894 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46898 \begin_inset space ~
46902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46904 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
46911 \begin_layout Description
46912 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
46913 format you will use.
46914 In many cases this will be
46919 \begin_inset Index idx
46922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46930 If the newer package
46935 \begin_inset Index idx
46938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46940 packages ! polyglossia
46945 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46946 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46947 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
46949 this package will be used instead of
46956 \begin_layout Description
46958 \begin_inset space ~
46969 would be more appropriate.
46972 \begin_layout Description
46973 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
46974 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
46978 (for German texts), type in
46981 \begin_inset Newline newline
46986 usepackage{ngerman}
46989 \begin_layout Description
46990 None will not use a language package.
46991 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
46994 \begin_layout Standard
46995 Here is a list with the important encodings:
46998 \begin_layout Description
47000 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
47002 \begin_inset space ~
47006 \begin_inset space ~
47010 \begin_inset space ~
47017 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47023 \begin_inset Index idx
47026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47028 packages ! inputenc
47034 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
47035 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
47036 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
47042 \begin_layout Description
47043 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
47045 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
47046 commands, which may result in a big
47047 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
47048 -commands are needed.
47050 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
47051 This is the same as the
47064 \begin_layout Description
47066 \begin_inset space ~
47070 \begin_inset space ~
47073 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
47076 \begin_layout Description
47078 \begin_inset space ~
47082 \begin_inset space ~
47085 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
47088 \begin_layout Description
47090 \begin_inset space ~
47093 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
47096 \begin_layout Description
47098 \begin_inset space ~
47102 \begin_inset space ~
47105 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
47106 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
47109 \begin_layout Description
47111 \begin_inset space ~
47115 \begin_inset space ~
47118 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
47122 \begin_layout Description
47124 \begin_inset space ~
47128 \begin_inset space ~
47131 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
47132 ISO-8859-13 encoding
47135 \begin_layout Description
47137 \begin_inset space ~
47141 \begin_inset space ~
47145 \begin_inset space ~
47148 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
47149 \begin_inset space ~
47155 \begin_layout Description
47157 \begin_inset space ~
47161 \begin_inset space ~
47165 \begin_inset space ~
47168 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
47169 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
47172 \begin_layout Description
47174 \begin_inset space ~
47178 \begin_inset space ~
47181 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
47182 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
47183 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47184 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
47185 \begin_inset space ~
47189 \begin_inset space ~
47195 \begin_layout Description
47197 \begin_inset space ~
47201 \begin_inset space ~
47204 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
47205 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
47206 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47208 should try to use the encoding Unicode
47209 \begin_inset space ~
47213 \begin_inset space ~
47219 \begin_layout Description
47221 \begin_inset space ~
47225 \begin_inset space ~
47228 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
47231 \begin_layout Description
47233 \begin_inset space ~
47237 \begin_inset space ~
47240 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
47243 \begin_layout Description
47245 \begin_inset space ~
47249 \begin_inset space ~
47252 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
47255 \begin_layout Description
47257 \begin_inset space ~
47260 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
47263 \begin_layout Description
47265 \begin_inset space ~
47268 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
47271 \begin_layout Description
47273 \begin_inset space ~
47277 \begin_inset space ~
47280 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
47283 \begin_layout Description
47285 \begin_inset space ~
47289 \begin_inset space ~
47295 \begin_layout Description
47297 \begin_inset space ~
47301 \begin_inset space ~
47304 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
47307 \begin_layout Description
47309 \begin_inset space ~
47313 \begin_inset space ~
47319 \begin_layout Description
47321 \begin_inset space ~
47325 \begin_inset space ~
47328 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47334 \begin_inset Index idx
47337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47344 , when using this, set the document language to
47349 \begin_layout Description
47351 \begin_inset space ~
47355 \begin_inset space ~
47358 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47363 , when using this, set the document language to
47366 \begin_inset space ~
47372 \begin_layout Description
47374 \begin_inset space ~
47378 \begin_inset space ~
47381 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47387 \begin_inset Index idx
47390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47392 packages ! japanese
47397 , when using this, set the document language to
47402 \begin_layout Description
47404 \begin_inset space ~
47408 \begin_inset space ~
47411 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47416 , when using this, set the document language to
47421 \begin_layout Description
47423 \begin_inset space ~
47427 \begin_inset space ~
47430 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47435 , when using this, set the document language to
47440 \begin_layout Description
47442 \begin_inset space ~
47445 (EUC-KR) for Korean
47448 \begin_layout Description
47450 \begin_inset space ~
47454 \begin_inset space ~
47458 \begin_inset space ~
47461 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
47464 \begin_layout Description
47466 \begin_inset space ~
47470 \begin_inset space ~
47474 \begin_inset space ~
47477 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
47478 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
47479 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
47482 \begin_layout Description
47484 \begin_inset space ~
47488 \begin_inset space ~
47494 \begin_layout Description
47496 \begin_inset space ~
47500 \begin_inset space ~
47503 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
47504 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
47507 \begin_layout Description
47509 \begin_inset space ~
47513 \begin_inset space ~
47516 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47522 \begin_inset Index idx
47525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47532 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
47533 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
47535 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
47536 with the default encoding (
47538 Unicode (utf8) [default]
47544 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
47545 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47550 \begin_layout Description
47552 \begin_inset space ~
47560 \begin_inset space ~
47563 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
47570 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47573 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47580 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47581 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47583 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47586 \begin_layout Description
47588 \begin_inset space ~
47592 \begin_inset space ~
47595 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47601 \begin_inset Index idx
47604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47612 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
47615 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
47617 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
47618 This used to be more comprehensive than
47621 \begin_inset space ~
47626 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
47631 \begin_layout Description
47633 \begin_inset space ~
47636 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47642 \begin_inset Index idx
47645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47647 packages ! inputenc
47654 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
47655 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
47657 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
47658 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
47659 with the default encoding (
47661 Unicode (utf8) [default]
47667 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
47668 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47673 \begin_layout Description
47675 \begin_inset space ~
47679 \begin_inset space ~
47683 \begin_inset space ~
47686 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
47687 \begin_inset space ~
47693 \begin_layout Description
47695 \begin_inset space ~
47699 \begin_inset space ~
47703 \begin_inset space ~
47706 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
47707 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
47708 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
47712 \begin_layout Description
47714 \begin_inset space ~
47718 \begin_inset space ~
47722 \begin_inset space ~
47725 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
47726 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
47729 \begin_layout Section
47731 \begin_inset Index idx
47734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47741 \begin_inset Index idx
47744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47751 \begin_inset Index idx
47754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47755 Color ! Shaded boxes
47761 \begin_inset Index idx
47764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47765 Color ! Greyed-out notes
47773 \begin_layout Standard
47774 Here you can alter the font color for the
47778 (default: black), for
47781 \begin_inset space ~
47786 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
47790 (default: white) and for
47793 \begin_inset space ~
47803 sets the color back to the default.
47806 \begin_layout Standard
47807 Clicking any button showing
47815 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
47816 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
47817 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
47818 later more quickly.
47821 \begin_layout Standard
47822 Note, if you change the
47825 \begin_inset space ~
47830 font color and use the option
47833 \begin_inset space ~
47838 in the document settings under
47841 \begin_inset space ~
47846 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
47847 \begin_inset space ~
47851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47853 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47860 \begin_layout Standard
47861 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
47867 \begin_layout Standard
47871 \begin_inset space ~
47880 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
47883 \begin_inset space ~
47886 Code after a forced page break:
47889 \begin_layout Itemize
47890 For the page color:
47891 \begin_inset Newline newline
47898 pagecolor{color name}
47901 \begin_layout Itemize
47902 For the text color:
47903 \begin_inset Newline newline
47913 \begin_layout Standard
47914 You are restricted to one of
47950 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
47957 \begin_inset space ~
47963 \begin_inset Newline newline
47966 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
47967 names to refer to them:
47970 \begin_layout Itemize
47976 \begin_inset Newline newline
47981 page_backgroundcolor
47984 \begin_layout Itemize
47988 \begin_inset space ~
47994 \begin_inset Newline newline
48002 \begin_layout Itemize
48006 \begin_inset space ~
48012 \begin_inset Newline newline
48020 \begin_layout Itemize
48024 \begin_inset space ~
48030 \begin_inset Newline newline
48038 \begin_layout Standard
48039 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
48042 \begin_inset space ~
48050 \begin_inset space ~
48058 \begin_layout Section
48060 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
48064 \begin_layout Standard
48066 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
48067 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
48068 \begin_inset space ~
48072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48074 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
48082 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
48083 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
48086 \begin_layout Standard
48088 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
48089 Additionally, you can advise LyX to place a change bar in the margin of
48091 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
48094 \begin_layout Section
48098 \begin_layout Standard
48099 Here you can adjust the
48103 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
48107 as described in section
48108 \begin_inset space ~
48112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48114 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
48119 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
48123 \begin_layout Standard
48125 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
48126 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
48128 The functionality is handled by package lineno and and additional options
48129 of this package can be used as well.
48130 The most common one are:
48133 \begin_layout Description
48135 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
48136 right Line numbers to the right margin
48139 \begin_layout Description
48141 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
48142 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
48146 \begin_layout Description
48148 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
48149 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
48152 \begin_layout Description
48154 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989692
48155 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
48158 \begin_layout Description
48160 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989752
48161 pagewise Restart numbering for each page
48164 \begin_layout Description
48166 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
48168 \begin_inset space ~
48171 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
48176 \begin_layout Section
48180 \begin_layout Standard
48181 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48187 \begin_inset Index idx
48190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48192 packages ! biblatex
48202 \begin_inset Index idx
48205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48217 \begin_inset Index idx
48220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48228 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48231 Sectioned bibliography
48233 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48239 \begin_inset Index idx
48242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48244 packages ! bibtopic
48254 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
48255 Finally, you can select a document-specific
48259 for the generation of the bibliography.
48260 For a further description of these possibilities see section
48261 \begin_inset space ~
48265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48267 reference "sec:Bibliography"
48274 \begin_layout Section
48278 \begin_layout Standard
48279 Here you can define the
48283 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
48285 \begin_inset space ~
48289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48291 reference "sec:Index"
48298 \begin_layout Section
48302 \begin_layout Standard
48303 The PDF properties are explained in section
48304 \begin_inset space ~
48308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48310 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
48317 \begin_layout Section
48321 \begin_layout Standard
48322 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
48323 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48329 \begin_inset Index idx
48332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48344 \begin_inset Index idx
48347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48359 \begin_inset Index idx
48362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48374 \begin_inset Index idx
48377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48389 \begin_inset Index idx
48392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48394 packages ! mathdots
48404 \begin_inset Index idx
48407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48409 packages ! mathtools
48419 \begin_inset Index idx
48422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48434 \begin_inset Index idx
48437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48439 packages ! stackrel
48449 \begin_inset Index idx
48452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48454 packages ! stmaryrd
48464 \begin_inset Index idx
48467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48469 packages ! undertilde
48474 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
48477 \begin_layout Description
48478 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
48479 -errors in formulas,
48480 ensure that you have this enabled.
48483 \begin_layout Description
48484 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
48485 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
48486 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
48490 \begin_layout Description
48491 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
48494 \begin_inset space ~
48506 \begin_layout Description
48507 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
48510 \begin_inset space ~
48522 \begin_layout Description
48523 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
48534 \begin_layout Description
48535 mathtools is used for the math commands
48571 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
48578 \begin_layout Description
48579 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
48581 Chemical Symbols and Equations
48590 \begin_layout Description
48591 stackrel is used for the math command
48608 \begin_layout Description
48609 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
48612 \begin_layout Description
48613 undertilde is used for the math command
48621 Accents for one Character
48630 \begin_layout Section
48632 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
48634 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
48640 \begin_layout Standard
48642 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
48643 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
48646 \begin_layout Standard
48648 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
48649 The float placement options
48650 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
48653 are described in the section
48656 \begin_inset space ~
48660 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
48662 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
48670 \begin_inset space ~
48678 \begin_layout Section
48682 \begin_layout Standard
48683 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
48685 Program Code Listings
48690 \begin_inset space ~
48698 \begin_layout Section
48702 \begin_layout Standard
48703 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
48711 set to be used and set the
48716 The itemize environment is described in section
48717 \begin_inset space ~
48721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48723 reference "sec:Itemize"
48730 \begin_layout Standard
48731 You can furthermore specify a
48734 \begin_inset space ~
48739 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48740 command of the desired character.
48741 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
48748 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
48750 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48754 \begin_inset space \space{}
48758 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
48768 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
48769 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
48772 \begin_layout Standard
48773 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48781 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48782 -packages in the preamble (menu
48785 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48786 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48789 \begin_inset space ~
48795 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
48799 usepackage{textcomp}
48802 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
48806 usepackage{amssymb}
48816 \begin_layout Section
48820 \begin_layout Standard
48821 Branches are described in section
48822 \begin_inset space ~
48826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48828 reference "sec:Branches"
48835 \begin_layout Section
48837 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48839 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
48846 \begin_layout Standard
48847 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
48850 \begin_layout Description
48852 \begin_inset space ~
48856 \begin_inset space ~
48859 Format: The format that is used when you enter
48860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48879 View Master Document
48880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48887 Update Master Document
48888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48895 menu or the toolbar.
48896 The default is set in
48898 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48899 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
48901 \begin_inset space ~
48904 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
48908 \begin_inset space ~
48912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48914 reference "sec:File-Formats"
48921 \begin_layout Description
48923 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
48925 \begin_inset space ~
48929 \begin_inset space ~
48933 \begin_inset space ~
48936 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
48941 option which is needed with some packages.
48942 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
48943 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
48946 \begin_layout Description
48948 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
48950 \begin_inset space ~
48954 \begin_inset space ~
48957 Options offers settings for the
48965 \begin_layout Itemize
48969 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
48971 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
48973 \begin_inset space ~
48979 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
48981 \begin_inset space ~
48985 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
48991 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
48993 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
48994 settings for the menu
48996 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49000 \begin_inset space ~
49004 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
49007 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
49008 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
49013 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
49015 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
49017 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
49020 or a detailed description see section
49022 Reverse DVI/PDF search
49027 \begin_inset space ~
49033 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
49037 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
49041 \begin_layout Itemize
49043 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
49046 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
49048 determines whether so-called
49049 \begin_inset Quotes els
49053 \begin_inset Quotes ers
49057 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
49059 \begin_inset Quotes els
49063 \begin_inset Quotes ers
49066 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
49067 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
49068 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
49070 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
49072 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
49073 macros, you can uncheck this.
49074 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
49081 \begin_layout Description
49083 \begin_inset space ~
49087 \begin_inset space ~
49090 Options offers settings for the export format
49098 \begin_inset space ~
49103 will assure that the output follows exactly version
49104 \begin_inset space ~
49107 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
49111 \begin_inset space ~
49116 settings are described in detail in section
49118 Math Output in XHTML
49123 \begin_inset space ~
49132 \begin_inset space ~
49136 \begin_inset space ~
49141 is used for the size of equations in the output.
49144 \begin_layout Description
49146 \begin_inset space ~
49151 Save transient properties
49153 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
49154 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
49155 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
49159 \begin_layout Itemize
49160 the activation of change tracking
49163 \begin_layout Itemize
49164 the output of tracked changes
49167 \begin_layout Itemize
49168 the recording of the document directory path.
49171 \begin_layout Standard
49172 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
49173 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
49177 \begin_layout Section
49185 \begin_layout Standard
49186 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
49188 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
49190 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
49192 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
49196 \begin_layout Standard
49197 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49198 -syntax is given in section
49199 \begin_inset space ~
49203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49205 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
49212 \begin_layout Chapter
49218 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49220 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
49225 \begin_inset Index idx
49228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49237 \begin_layout Standard
49238 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
49240 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49244 It has the following submenus.
49247 \begin_layout Section
49251 \begin_layout Subsection
49255 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49256 User Interface File
49257 \begin_inset Index idx
49260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49261 Customization ! of toolbars
49267 \begin_inset Index idx
49270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49271 Customization ! of menus
49279 \begin_layout Standard
49280 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
49281 interface (ui) file.
49282 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
49290 \begin_layout Description
49295 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
49298 \begin_layout Description
49305 the menu entries in popup context menus
49308 \begin_layout Description
49313 specifies the toolbar buttons
49316 \begin_layout Standard
49317 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
49318 and edit the entries.
49321 \begin_layout Standard
49322 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
49334 entries must be finished with an explicit
49359 and in the case of the
49360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49372 The syntax for the entries is:
49375 \begin_layout Standard
49376 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49405 \begin_layout Standard
49407 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49410 All the \SpecialChar LyX
49411 -functions are listed in the menu
49413 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
49415 \begin_inset space ~
49423 \begin_layout Standard
49424 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
49430 \begin_layout Standard
49431 For example, assuming you use the menu
49433 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49436 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
49440 \begin_layout Standard
49441 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49465 \begin_layout Standard
49467 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49482 to have the sixth bookmark.
49485 \begin_layout Standard
49489 \begin_inset space ~
49494 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
49495 's toolbar buttons.
49496 The currently available icon sets are compared in
49497 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49500 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
49508 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49512 \begin_layout Standard
49515 Enable tool tips in main work area
49517 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
49521 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49525 \begin_layout Standard
49530 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
49531 should display in the menu
49533 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49535 \begin_inset space ~
49543 \begin_layout Subsection
49547 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49551 \begin_layout Standard
49554 Restore window layouts and geometries
49557 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
49558 the last \SpecialChar LyX
49562 \begin_layout Standard
49565 Restore cursor positions
49567 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
49571 \begin_layout Standard
49574 Load opened files from last session
49576 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
49580 \begin_layout Standard
49583 Clear all session information
49585 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
49586 sessions (cursor positions, names
49587 of last opened documents, etc.).
49590 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49592 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49594 name "subsec:Backup documents"
49599 \begin_inset Index idx
49602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49611 \begin_layout Standard
49614 Backup original documents when saving
49616 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
49617 it was saved the last time.
49618 It is stored in the
49621 \begin_inset space ~
49627 \begin_inset space ~
49631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49633 reference "sec:Paths"
49637 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
49640 \begin_inset space ~
49646 The backup file has the file extension
49647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49661 \begin_layout Standard
49664 Backup documents, every
49666 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
49669 \begin_layout Standard
49672 Save documents compressed by default
49674 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
49675 \begin_inset space ~
49679 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49681 reference "subsec:Compressed"
49686 This applies to newly created documents only.
49687 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
49690 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49691 Windows & work area
49694 \begin_layout Standard
49697 Open documents in tabs
49699 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
49703 \begin_layout Standard
49708 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
49713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49715 \begin_inset space ~
49719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49721 reference "sec:Paths"
49725 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
49732 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
49733 documents will be opened in the same running instance
49734 of \SpecialChar LyX
49736 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
49737 instance is created for each file.
49740 \begin_layout Standard
49743 Single close-tab button
49745 is checked, there will only be one close button (
49755 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
49756 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
49757 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
49761 \begin_layout Standard
49762 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49770 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
49771 before the change takes effect.
49779 \begin_layout Standard
49784 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
49786 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
49788 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
49792 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
49793 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
49794 and only want to close the view in once instance.
49797 \begin_layout Subsection
49799 \begin_inset Index idx
49802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49809 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49811 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
49818 \begin_layout Standard
49819 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
49823 \begin_layout Standard
49824 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49832 This section only deals with the fonts
49836 the \SpecialChar LyX
49838 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
49841 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49842 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49853 \begin_layout Standard
49854 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
49871 (depends on the system) as its
49874 \begin_inset space ~
49890 \begin_layout Standard
49891 You can change the font size with the
49898 \begin_layout Standard
49903 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
49905 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49908 points have the size of 1
49909 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49913 \begin_inset space ~
49917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49919 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
49924 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
49925 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49929 The sizes are explained in detail in section
49930 \begin_inset space ~
49934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49936 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
49943 \begin_layout Subsection
49945 \begin_inset Index idx
49948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49949 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
49956 \begin_inset Index idx
49959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49968 \begin_layout Standard
49969 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
49970 by choosing an item in the
49971 list and selecting the
49978 \begin_layout Standard
49979 By checking the option
49983 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
49986 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
49987 \begin_inset space ~
49991 \begin_inset space ~
49996 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
49999 \begin_layout Subsection
50001 \begin_inset Index idx
50004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50013 \begin_layout Standard
50014 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
50018 \begin_layout Standard
50023 enables previewing snippets of your document.
50024 This feature is described in section
50025 \begin_inset space ~
50029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50031 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
50038 \begin_layout Standard
50039 Checking the option
50042 \begin_inset space ~
50046 \begin_inset space ~
50050 \begin_inset space ~
50055 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
50058 \begin_layout Section
50060 \begin_inset Index idx
50063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50072 \begin_layout Subsection
50076 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50080 \begin_layout Standard
50083 Cursor follows scrollbar
50085 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
50089 \begin_layout Standard
50090 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
50091 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
50092 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
50095 \begin_layout Standard
50098 Scroll below end of document
50100 is self-explanatory.
50103 \begin_layout Standard
50104 In \SpecialChar LyX
50105 one can jump from word to word by pressing
50112 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
50114 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
50115 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
50116 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
50120 \begin_layout Standard
50122 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924785
50125 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
50127 is for users who don't want tracked changes to be dissolved on copy and
50128 paste operations (i.
50129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50132 e., inserted as new text with the deletions removed).
50133 If this is checked, the change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as
50134 is, independent if changes are currently tracked or not.
50135 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
50136 dissolving from insets.
50141 \begin_layout Standard
50144 Sort environments alphabetically
50146 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
50149 \begin_layout Standard
50152 Group environments by their category
50154 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
50157 \begin_layout Standard
50162 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
50171 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509726
50175 \begin_layout Standard
50177 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
50180 Search drive for cited files
50182 allows \SpecialChar LyX
50183 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
50186 \begin_inset space ~
50190 \begin_inset space ~
50194 \begin_inset space ~
50198 \begin_inset space ~
50201 Content\SpecialChar ldots
50204 context menu on a citation.
50209 field determines the search pattern.
50211 \begin_inset space ~
50215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50217 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
50226 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50230 \begin_layout Standard
50231 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
50236 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
50237 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
50241 \begin_layout Subsection
50243 \begin_inset Index idx
50246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50253 \begin_inset Index idx
50256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50257 Settings ! Shortcuts
50265 \begin_layout Standard
50270 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
50272 Several binding files are available, among them:
50275 \begin_layout Description
50276 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
50279 \begin_layout Description
50280 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
50292 \begin_layout Description
50293 mac.bind a set of bindings for
50296 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50304 \begin_layout Standard
50305 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
50310 , and binding files for special languages.
50311 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
50312 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50316 \begin_inset space \space{}
50320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50328 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
50329 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
50330 will try to use the appropriate binding
50334 \begin_layout Standard
50335 Some binding files, like
50339 , only have a limited scope.
50340 When looking at the end of the file
50344 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
50347 \begin_layout Standard
50351 \begin_inset space ~
50355 \begin_inset space ~
50360 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
50361 in the selected key binding file.
50364 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50366 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50368 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
50373 \begin_inset Index idx
50376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50377 Key Bindings ! Editing
50385 \begin_layout Standard
50386 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
50387 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
50388 functions and the bound shortcuts.
50389 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
50392 Show key-bindings containing
50395 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
50396 Insert there for example as keyword
50397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50404 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
50405 functions that contain
50406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50414 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
50415 All \SpecialChar LyX
50416 functions are also listed in the file
50421 that you will find in the
50428 \begin_layout Standard
50429 For example, to add the shortcut
50437 , select the function and press the
50442 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
50443 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
50446 \begin_layout Standard
50447 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
50448 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
50453 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337868
50455 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337869
50460 ” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated
50463 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
50467 \begin_layout Standard
50468 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
50471 \begin_layout Standard
50472 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
50474 The syntax of the entries is:
50477 \begin_layout Standard
50483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50502 \begin_layout Standard
50503 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
50504 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
50505 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50532 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
50533 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
50534 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
50535 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
50537 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
50541 , you needed to specify it as
50546 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
50549 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
50552 \begin_layout Subsection
50554 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50556 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
50561 \begin_inset Index idx
50564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50571 \begin_inset Index idx
50574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50575 Settings ! Keyboard Map
50583 \begin_layout Standard
50584 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
50585 For the case where this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
50586 provides keyboard maps.
50587 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
50588 is a Romanian one, you can enable
50591 \begin_inset space ~
50595 \begin_inset space ~
50600 and select the keyboard map file named
50607 \begin_layout Standard
50616 keyboard map and, if you use the
50620 bindings, you can select the first and second with
50623 arg "keymap-primary"
50629 arg "keymap-secondary"
50632 respectively or toggle between them with
50635 arg "keymap-toggle"
50641 \begin_layout Standard
50642 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50650 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
50659 \begin_layout Standard
50660 You can also specify the mouse
50662 Wheel scrolling speed
50665 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
50669 Middle mouse button pasting
50671 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
50672 inserts the content of the clipboard.
50675 \begin_layout Standard
50683 \begin_inset space ~
50687 \begin_inset space ~
50692 you can select a key for zooming.
50693 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
50696 \begin_layout Subsection
50700 \begin_layout Standard
50701 Input completion is described in section
50702 \begin_inset space ~
50706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50708 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
50715 \begin_layout Section
50717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50724 \begin_inset Index idx
50727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50734 \begin_inset Index idx
50737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50746 \begin_layout Standard
50747 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
50748 are normally determined during
50750 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
50753 \begin_layout Description
50755 \begin_inset space ~
50758 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
50759 's working directory.
50760 It is the default when you
50771 \begin_inset space ~
50779 \begin_layout Description
50781 \begin_inset space ~
50784 templates This directory
50785 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
50786 contains the templates that are shown
50787 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
50788 will be opened when you use the menu
50789 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
50794 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50796 \begin_inset space ~
50800 \begin_inset space ~
50808 \begin_layout Description
50810 \begin_inset space ~
50813 files This directory
50814 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
50815 will be opened when you use the
50816 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
50817 contains the example files that are listed in
50820 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
50829 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50831 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
50833 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
50839 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
50841 \begin_inset Newline newline
50845 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50857 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
50858 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
50868 \begin_layout Description
50870 \begin_inset space ~
50874 \begin_inset Index idx
50877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50883 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
50884 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
50885 \begin_inset space ~
50889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50891 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
50899 will be used to save the backups.
50900 \begin_inset Newline newline
50903 Backup files have the ending
50904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50914 \begin_layout Description
50916 \begin_inset space ~
50919 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
50920 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
50922 \begin_inset Newline newline
50929 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50935 You can edit this file with the program
50944 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
50945 in its preferences under
50948 \begin_inset space ~
50954 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
50959 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
50961 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
50962 in your \SpecialChar LyX
50968 and \SpecialChar LyX
50969 need to be running the same time.
50970 \begin_inset Newline newline
50973 The pipe is also used for the
50977 feature, see section
50978 \begin_inset space ~
50982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50984 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
50989 \begin_inset Newline newline
50992 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
50993 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
50994 \begin_inset Newline newline
51010 \begin_layout Description
51012 \begin_inset space ~
51015 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
51018 \begin_layout Description
51020 \begin_inset space ~
51023 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
51024 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
51025 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
51028 \begin_layout Description
51030 \begin_inset space ~
51033 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
51039 You only need to specify it if you are using
51043 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
51045 For \SpecialChar LyX
51050 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
51054 \begin_layout Description
51056 \begin_inset space ~
51059 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
51060 When \SpecialChar LyX
51061 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
51062 to find it on the system.
51063 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
51065 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
51067 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51071 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51074 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
51075 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
51078 \begin_layout Description
51080 \begin_inset space ~
51083 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
51084 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
51085 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
51086 code or in the document
51088 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
51090 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
51091 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
51092 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
51093 scanned for the input files.
51094 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
51095 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
51097 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
51098 compilation may fail for some documents.
51101 \begin_layout Section
51105 \begin_layout Standard
51106 Here you can insert your
51115 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
51117 \begin_inset space ~
51121 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51123 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
51127 , to mark changes you make as yours.
51130 \begin_layout Section
51132 \begin_inset Index idx
51135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51136 Language ! Settings
51142 \begin_inset Index idx
51145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51146 Settings ! Language
51154 \begin_layout Subsection
51156 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51158 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
51165 \begin_layout Description
51167 \begin_inset space ~
51171 \begin_inset space ~
51174 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
51176 You can find its actual translation status here:
51177 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51179 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
51185 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
51189 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51191 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
51192 LaTeX Language Support
51197 \begin_layout Description
51199 \begin_inset space ~
51202 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
51203 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
51204 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
51205 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
51206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51222 The most widespread language package is
51227 \begin_inset Index idx
51230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51237 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
51239 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
51240 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
51241 come with the alternative
51247 \begin_inset Index idx
51250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51252 packages ! polyglossia
51257 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
51258 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
51264 The available selections are described in section
51265 \begin_inset space ~
51269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51271 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
51278 \begin_layout Description
51280 \begin_inset space ~
51284 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
51285 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
51286 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
51288 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
51292 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
51296 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
51298 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
51302 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
51303 that is used to switch to a different language
51304 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
51305 to start the package
51309 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
51310 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
51314 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
51315 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
51318 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
51322 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
51330 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
51338 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
51341 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
51343 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
51347 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
51365 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51366 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
51373 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
51374 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51379 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
51384 , this setting is ignored.
51389 \begin_layout Description
51391 \begin_inset space ~
51395 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
51402 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
51403 Use this if the language switch set in
51407 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
51411 's alternative command
51415 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
51416 \SpecialChar allowbreak
51419 end{otherlanguage*}
51423 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
51424 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
51425 command toggles the package on and off
51426 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
51427 Empty by default, as
51431 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51433 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
51438 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51444 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
51449 , this setting is ignored.
51454 \begin_layout Description
51456 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
51458 \begin_inset space ~
51462 \begin_inset space ~
51465 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
51469 \begin_layout Description
51471 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
51473 \begin_inset space ~
51477 \begin_inset space ~
51480 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
51486 \begin_layout Description
51488 \begin_inset space ~
51492 \begin_inset space ~
51496 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
51498 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
51501 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
51502 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
51505 to the document class options
51506 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
51507 rather than the language package options.
51508 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
51512 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
51513 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
51515 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
51516 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
51518 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
51523 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
51524 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
51533 \begin_layout Description
51535 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
51537 \begin_inset space ~
51541 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
51543 \begin_inset space ~
51547 \begin_inset space ~
51551 \begin_inset space ~
51557 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
51559 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
51562 this option is set,
51563 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
51564 the language switch defined in
51567 \begin_inset space ~
51572 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
51573 to the document language.
51574 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
51575 This might be needed if you use a non-default
51578 \begin_inset space ~
51583 or if a package resets the document language.
51584 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
51585 usually should be the document language).
51586 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
51587 documents start with the chosen document language.
51588 When this option is not set, the
51591 \begin_inset space ~
51596 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51598 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
51601 \begin_inset space ~
51611 \begin_layout Description
51613 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
51615 \begin_inset space ~
51619 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
51621 \begin_inset space ~
51625 \begin_inset space ~
51629 \begin_inset space ~
51635 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
51639 \begin_inset space ~
51643 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
51644 Set document language explicitly
51650 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
51652 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
51658 \begin_inset space ~
51664 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
51666 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
51670 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
51672 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
51675 the end of the document.
51676 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
51680 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51681 \paragraph_spacing single
51683 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
51689 \begin_layout Description
51691 \begin_inset space ~
51695 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
51697 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
51701 \begin_inset space ~
51705 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
51707 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
51709 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
51713 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
51716 in a language different
51717 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
51719 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
51722 the document language will be
51723 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
51724 marked (by default with a blue
51727 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
51729 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
51733 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
51737 \begin_layout Description
51739 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
51741 \begin_inset space ~
51745 \begin_inset space ~
51749 \begin_inset space ~
51752 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
51753 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
51754 switched via the operating system.
51755 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
51757 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51760 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
51761 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
51766 \begin_layout Description
51768 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
51770 \begin_inset space ~
51774 \begin_inset space ~
51777 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
51778 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
51783 \begin_layout Description
51785 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
51787 \begin_inset space ~
51791 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
51793 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
51797 \begin_inset space ~
51801 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
51802 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
51803 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
51805 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
51809 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
51811 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
51812 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
51814 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51815 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
51816 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
51818 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
51823 \begin_layout Standard
51828 means that the cursor
51829 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
51830 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
51831 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
51833 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51836 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
51837 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
51841 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
51843 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
51844 specific case always means: move
51848 in text (even if this means:
51854 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51855 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
51856 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
51857 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
51858 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
51859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51870 \begin_layout Standard
51872 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
51877 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
51878 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
51879 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
51883 ) when coming from the left.
51884 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
51886 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51887 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
51888 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
51893 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51895 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
51899 \begin_layout Description
51901 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
51903 \begin_inset space ~
51907 \begin_inset space ~
51910 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
51911 separator alignment).
51912 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
51914 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51917 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
51918 (static) custom character here.
51921 \begin_layout Description
51923 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
51925 \begin_inset space ~
51929 \begin_inset space ~
51932 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
51938 \begin_layout Subsection
51942 \begin_layout Standard
51943 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
51944 \begin_inset space ~
51948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51950 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
51957 \begin_layout Section
51961 \begin_layout Subsection
51963 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51965 name "subsec:General-output"
51972 \begin_layout Description
51974 \begin_inset space ~
51977 search Commands that will be used for the menu
51979 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
51981 \begin_inset space ~
51987 For a detailed description see section
51989 Reverse DVI/PDF search
51994 \begin_inset space ~
52002 \begin_layout Description
52004 \begin_inset space ~
52007 Options Options for the program
52011 that is used for the export format
52016 \begin_inset space ~
52020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52022 reference "subsec:Export"
52027 Possible options are listed in the
52032 \begin_inset Newline newline
52036 \begin_inset Flex URL
52039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52041 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
52051 \begin_layout Description
52053 \begin_inset space ~
52057 \begin_inset space ~
52060 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
52063 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
52064 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
52066 \begin_inset space ~
52072 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
52075 \begin_layout Description
52077 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
52079 \begin_inset space ~
52083 \begin_inset Index idx
52086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52093 \begin_inset Index idx
52096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52097 Settings ! Date format
52102 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
52103 \begin_inset Newline newline
52107 \begin_inset Flex URL
52110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52112 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
52118 \begin_inset Newline newline
52121 For example the format
52122 \begin_inset Newline newline
52126 \begin_inset Newline newline
52129 prints the date as day/month/year.
52134 \begin_layout Description
52136 \begin_inset space ~
52140 \begin_inset space ~
52143 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
52144 is allowed to overwrite on export.
52147 \begin_layout Subsection
52153 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52155 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
52160 \begin_inset Index idx
52163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52164 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
52173 \begin_layout Description
52175 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
52177 \begin_inset space ~
52185 \begin_inset space ~
52189 \begin_inset space ~
52192 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
52197 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
52218 are used for Cyrillic.
52219 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
52220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52232 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
52234 sets up in the background.
52235 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
52240 \begin_layout Description
52242 \begin_inset space ~
52246 \begin_inset space ~
52250 \begin_inset space ~
52254 \begin_inset space ~
52257 options They only have an effect when the program
52261 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
52264 \begin_layout Standard
52265 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
52266 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
52267 manuals of the applications.
52270 \begin_layout Description
52272 \begin_inset space ~
52275 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
52276 \begin_inset space ~
52280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52282 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
52289 \begin_layout Description
52291 \begin_inset space ~
52294 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
52295 \begin_inset space ~
52299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52301 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
52308 \begin_layout Description
52310 \begin_inset space ~
52313 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
52314 \begin_inset space ~
52318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52320 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
52327 \begin_layout Description
52333 \begin_inset space ~
52336 command Command for the program
52338 Check\SpecialChar TeX
52341 that is described in the section
52343 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
52348 Additional Features
52353 \begin_layout Standard
52354 There are additionally the following options:
52357 \begin_layout Description
52359 \begin_inset space ~
52363 \begin_inset space ~
52367 \begin_inset space ~
52371 \begin_inset space ~
52376 \begin_inset space ~
52379 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
52380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52397 to separate folders.
52398 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
52400 \begin_inset Index idx
52403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52410 \begin_inset Index idx
52413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52422 \begin_layout Description
52424 \begin_inset space ~
52428 \begin_inset space ~
52432 \begin_inset space ~
52436 \begin_inset space ~
52440 \begin_inset space ~
52444 \begin_inset space ~
52447 changes Removes all manually set
52453 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
52454 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
52456 \begin_inset space ~
52461 dialog when changing the document class.
52464 \begin_layout Section
52466 \begin_inset space ~
52470 \begin_inset Index idx
52473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52482 \begin_layout Subsection
52484 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52486 name "subsec:Converters"
52491 \begin_inset Index idx
52494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52503 \begin_layout Standard
52504 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
52505 from one format to another.
52506 You can modify converters or create new ones.
52507 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
52514 \begin_inset space ~
52519 field and press the
52524 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
52528 \begin_inset space ~
52533 drop-down list, modify the
52537 field and press the
52544 \begin_layout Standard
52547 Converter File Cache
52553 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
52555 Maximum Age (in days
52558 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
52559 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
52562 \begin_layout Standard
52563 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
52564 definition, is described in the section
52575 \begin_layout Subsection
52577 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52579 name "sec:File-Formats"
52584 \begin_inset Index idx
52587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52594 \begin_inset Index idx
52597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52606 \begin_layout Standard
52607 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
52617 programs that should be used for certain formats.
52620 \begin_layout Standard
52621 You can also define the
52623 Default output format
52625 that is used when you use
52627 View, Update, View Master Document
52631 Update Master Document
52637 menu or the toolbar.
52640 \begin_layout Standard
52641 More about formats and their options is described in the section
52652 \begin_layout Standard
52653 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
52655 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
52656 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
52657 This is done by specifying a
52662 More about this is described in the section
52673 \begin_layout Chapter
52674 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
52676 \begin_inset Index idx
52679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52686 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52688 name "chap:Units-available-in"
52695 \begin_layout Standard
52697 \begin_inset space ~
52701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52703 reference "tab:Units"
52707 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
52708 and used in this documentation.
52711 \begin_layout Standard
52712 \begin_inset Float table
52719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52720 \begin_inset Caption Standard
52722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52723 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52738 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
52744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52746 \begin_inset Tabular
52747 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
52748 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
52749 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52750 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
52751 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52797 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52801 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52834 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52838 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52900 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52904 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
52908 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53065 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53069 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53102 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53139 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53143 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53175 scaled point (65536
53176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53180 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53243 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
53248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53367 % of original image width
53372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53456 \begin_layout Standard
53457 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
53460 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
53467 \begin_layout Bibliography
53468 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53469 LatexCommand bibitem
53476 The \SpecialChar LyX
53478 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53481 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
53487 \begin_inset Newline newline
53491 \begin_inset Flex URL
53494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53496 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
53504 \begin_layout Bibliography
53505 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53506 LatexCommand bibitem
53507 key "latexcompanion"
53512 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
53514 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
53515 Companion Second Edition.
53518 Addison-Wesley, 2004
53521 \begin_layout Bibliography
53522 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53523 LatexCommand bibitem
53529 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
53532 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
53536 Addison-Wesley, 2003
53539 \begin_layout Bibliography
53540 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53541 LatexCommand bibitem
53550 : A Document Preparation System.
53553 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
53556 \begin_layout Bibliography
53557 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53558 LatexCommand bibitem
53568 The \SpecialChar TeX
53572 Addison-Wesley, 1984
53575 \begin_layout Bibliography
53576 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53577 LatexCommand bibitem
53583 The \SpecialChar TeX
53585 \begin_inset Newline newline
53589 \begin_inset Flex URL
53592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53594 https://ctan.org/topic
53602 \begin_layout Bibliography
53603 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53604 LatexCommand bibitem
53610 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
53612 \begin_inset Newline newline
53616 \begin_inset Flex URL
53619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53621 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
53629 \begin_layout Bibliography
53630 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53631 LatexCommand bibitem
53638 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53640 name "Documentation"
53641 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
53648 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53652 \begin_inset Newline newline
53656 \begin_inset Flex URL
53659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53661 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
53669 \begin_layout Bibliography
53670 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53671 LatexCommand bibitem
53678 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53680 name "Documentation"
53681 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
53686 how to use the program
53688 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53692 \begin_inset Newline newline
53696 \begin_inset Flex URL
53699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53701 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
53709 \begin_layout Bibliography
53710 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53711 LatexCommand bibitem
53718 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53720 name "Documentation"
53721 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
53726 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53732 \begin_inset Index idx
53735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53737 packages ! biblatex
53743 \begin_inset Newline newline
53747 \begin_inset Flex URL
53750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53752 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
53760 \begin_layout Bibliography
53761 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53762 LatexCommand bibitem
53769 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53771 name "Documentation"
53772 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
53777 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53783 \begin_inset Index idx
53786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53794 \begin_inset Newline newline
53798 \begin_inset Flex URL
53801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53803 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
53811 \begin_layout Bibliography
53812 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53813 LatexCommand bibitem
53820 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53822 name "Documentation"
53823 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
53833 \begin_inset Newline newline
53837 \begin_inset Flex URL
53840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53842 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
53850 \begin_layout Bibliography
53851 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53852 LatexCommand bibitem
53853 key "makeindex-man"
53859 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53862 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
53872 \begin_inset Newline newline
53876 \begin_inset Flex URL
53879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53881 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
53889 \begin_layout Bibliography
53890 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53891 LatexCommand bibitem
53898 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53900 name "Documentation"
53901 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
53911 \begin_inset Newline newline
53915 \begin_inset Flex URL
53918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53920 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
53928 \begin_layout Bibliography
53929 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53930 LatexCommand bibitem
53937 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53939 name "Documentation"
53940 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
53945 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
53947 \begin_inset Newline newline
53951 \begin_inset Flex URL
53954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53956 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
53964 \begin_layout Bibliography
53965 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53966 LatexCommand bibitem
53973 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53975 name "Documentation"
53976 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
53981 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53987 \begin_inset Index idx
53990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53998 \begin_inset Newline newline
54002 \begin_inset Flex URL
54005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54007 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
54015 \begin_layout Bibliography
54016 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54017 LatexCommand bibitem
54024 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54026 name "Documentation"
54027 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
54032 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54038 \begin_inset Index idx
54041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54043 packages ! enumitem
54049 \begin_inset Newline newline
54053 \begin_inset Flex URL
54056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54058 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
54066 \begin_layout Bibliography
54067 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54068 LatexCommand bibitem
54075 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54077 name "Documentation"
54078 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
54083 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54089 \begin_inset Index idx
54092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54094 packages ! fancyhdr
54100 \begin_inset Newline newline
54104 \begin_inset Flex URL
54107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54109 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
54117 \begin_layout Bibliography
54118 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54119 LatexCommand bibitem
54126 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54128 name "Documentation"
54129 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
54134 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54140 \begin_inset Index idx
54143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54145 packages ! hyperref
54151 \begin_inset Newline newline
54155 \begin_inset Flex URL
54158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54160 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
54168 \begin_layout Bibliography
54169 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54170 LatexCommand bibitem
54177 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54179 name "Documentation"
54180 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
54185 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54191 \begin_inset Index idx
54194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54196 packages ! microtype
54202 \begin_inset Newline newline
54206 \begin_inset Flex URL
54209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54211 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
54219 \begin_layout Bibliography
54220 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54221 LatexCommand bibitem
54228 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54230 name "Documentation"
54231 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
54236 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54242 \begin_inset Index idx
54245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54253 \begin_inset Newline newline
54257 \begin_inset Flex URL
54260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54262 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
54270 \begin_layout Bibliography
54271 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54272 LatexCommand bibitem
54279 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54281 name "Documentation"
54282 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
54287 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54293 \begin_inset Index idx
54296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54298 packages ! prettyref
54304 \begin_inset Newline newline
54308 \begin_inset Flex URL
54311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54313 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
54321 \begin_layout Bibliography
54322 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54323 LatexCommand bibitem
54330 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54332 name "Documentation"
54333 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
54338 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54344 \begin_inset Index idx
54347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54349 packages ! refstyle
54355 \begin_inset Newline newline
54359 \begin_inset Flex URL
54362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54364 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
54372 \begin_layout Bibliography
54373 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54374 LatexCommand bibitem
54381 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54384 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
54389 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54391 \begin_inset Newline newline
54395 \begin_inset Flex URL
54398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54400 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
54408 \begin_layout Bibliography
54409 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54410 LatexCommand bibitem
54417 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54420 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
54425 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54427 \begin_inset Newline newline
54431 \begin_inset Flex URL
54434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54436 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
54444 \begin_layout Bibliography
54445 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54446 LatexCommand bibitem
54453 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54456 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
54461 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54462 for Cyrillic languages:
54463 \begin_inset Newline newline
54467 \begin_inset Flex URL
54470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54472 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
54480 \begin_layout Bibliography
54481 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54482 LatexCommand bibitem
54489 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54492 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
54497 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54499 \begin_inset Newline newline
54503 \begin_inset Flex URL
54506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54508 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
54516 \begin_layout Bibliography
54517 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54518 LatexCommand bibitem
54525 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54528 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
54533 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54535 \begin_inset Newline newline
54539 \begin_inset Flex URL
54542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54544 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
54552 \begin_layout Bibliography
54553 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54554 LatexCommand bibitem
54561 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54564 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
54569 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54571 \begin_inset Newline newline
54575 \begin_inset Flex URL
54578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54580 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
54588 \begin_layout Standard
54589 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
54596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54623 \begin_inset Note Note
54626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54633 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
54634 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
54635 bibliography is the second one:
54643 \begin_layout Standard
54644 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
54645 LatexCommand bibtex
54646 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
54647 options "biblio/alphadin"
54654 \begin_layout Standard
54655 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54659 \begin_layout Standard
54663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54669 pagedeclaration}[1]{
54672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54678 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
54686 \begin_inset Note Note
54689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54690 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
54691 \begin_inset space ~
54695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54697 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
54709 \begin_layout Standard
54710 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
54711 LatexCommand printnomenclature
54717 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
54718 LatexCommand printindex